re PR tree-optimization/43721 (Failure to optimise (a/b) and (a%b) into single __aeab...
[gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
56 * Misc:: Everything else.
57 @end menu
58
59 @node Target Structure
60 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
61 @cindex target hooks
62 @cindex target functions
63
64 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
65 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
66 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
67 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
68 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
69 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
70 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
71 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
72 @smallexample
73 #include "target.h"
74 #include "target-def.h"
75
76 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
77
78 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
79 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
80
81 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
82 @end smallexample
83 @end deftypevar
84
85 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
86 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
87 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
88 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
89 @code{targetm} structure.
90
91 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
92 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
93 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
94 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
95 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
96 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
97 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
98
99 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
100 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
101 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
102 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
103 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
104 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
105 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
106 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
107 default definition is used.
108
109 @node Driver
110 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
111 @cindex driver
112 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
113
114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
115 You can control the compilation driver.
116
117 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
118 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
119 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
120
121 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
122 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
123 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
124 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
125 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
126 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
127
128 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
129 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
130 that the other specs are easier to write.
131
132 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
133 @end defmac
134
135 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
136 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
137 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
138 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
139 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
140
141 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
142 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
143 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
144 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
145 everywhere it occurs.
146
147 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
148 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
149 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
150
151 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
152 @end defmac
153
154 @defmac CPP_SPEC
155 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
156 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
157 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
158
159 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
160 @end defmac
161
162 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
163 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
164 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
165 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
166 @end defmac
167
168 @defmac CC1_SPEC
169 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
170 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
171 front ends.
172 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
173 for GCC to pass to front ends.
174
175 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
176 @end defmac
177
178 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
179 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
180 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
181 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
182
183 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
184 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
185 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
186 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
187 @end defmac
188
189 @defmac ASM_SPEC
190 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
191 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
192 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
193 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
194
195 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
196 @end defmac
197
198 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
200 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
201 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
202 an example of this.
203
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
208 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
209 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
210 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
211 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
212 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
213
214 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
215 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
216 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
217 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
218 @end defmac
219
220 @defmac LINK_SPEC
221 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
222 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
223 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
224
225 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
226 @end defmac
227
228 @defmac LIB_SPEC
229 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
230 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
231 command given to the linker.
232
233 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
234 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
235 @end defmac
236
237 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
238 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
239 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
240 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
241 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
242
243 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
244 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
245 @end defmac
246
247 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
248 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
249 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
250 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
251 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
252 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
253 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
254 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
255 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
256 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
257 @end defmac
258
259 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
260 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
261 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
262 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
263 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
264 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
265 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
266 @end defmac
267
268 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
269 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
270 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
271 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
273 @end defmac
274
275 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
276 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
277 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
278 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
279
280 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
281 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
282 @end defmac
283
284 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very end of the command given to the linker.
288
289 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
290 @end defmac
291
292 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
293 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
294 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
295 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
296 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
297 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
298 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
299 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
300 @end defmac
301
302 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
303 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
304 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
305 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
306 @end defmac
307
308 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
309 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
310 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
311 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
312 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
313 @end defmac
314
315 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
316 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
317 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
318 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
319
320 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
321 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
322 string constant that provides the specification.
323
324 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
325
326 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
327 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
328 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
329 these definitions.
330
331 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
332 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
333 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
334 used.
335
336 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
337
338 @smallexample
339 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
340 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
341
342 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
343 @end smallexample
344
345 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
346 @smallexample
347 #undef CPP_SPEC
348 #define CPP_SPEC \
349 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
350 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
351 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
352 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
353
354 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
355 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
356 @end smallexample
357
358 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
359 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
360
361 @smallexample
362 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
363 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
364 @end smallexample
365 @end defmac
366
367 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
368 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
369 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
370 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
371 @end defmac
372
373 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
374 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
375 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
376 @end defmac
377
378 @defmac POST_LINK_SPEC
379 Define this macro to add additional steps to be executed after linker.
380 The default value of this macro is empty string.
381 @end defmac
382
383 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
384 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
385 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
386 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
387 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
388 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
389 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
390 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
391 @end defmac
392
393 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
394
395 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
396 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
397 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
398 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
399 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
400
401 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
402 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
403 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
404 @xref{Target Fragment}.
405 @end defmac
406
407 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
408 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
409 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
410 indicates an absolute file name.
411 @end defmac
412
413 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
414 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
415 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
416 when the compiler is built as a cross
417 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
418 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.ac}.
419 @end defmac
420
421 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
422 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
423 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
424 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
425 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
426 is built as a cross compiler.
427 @end defmac
428
429 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
430 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
431 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
432 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
433 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
434 is built as a cross compiler.
435 @end defmac
436
437 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
438 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
439 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
440 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
441 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
442 is built as a cross compiler.
443 @end defmac
444
445 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
446 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
447 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
448 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
449 @end defmac
450
451 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
452 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
453 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
454 cross compiler.
455 @end defmac
456
457 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
458 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
459 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
460 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
461 initialize the necessary environment variables.
462 @end defmac
463
464 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
465 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
466 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
467 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
468 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
469 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
470
471 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
472 replacement.
473 @end defmac
474
475 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
476 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
477 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
478 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
479 @end defmac
480
481 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
482 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
483 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
484 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
485 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
486 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
487 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
488 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
489 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
490
491 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
492 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
493 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
494 for C++-only directories,
495 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
496 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
497 the array with a null element.
498
499 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
500 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
501 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
502 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
503
504 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
505
506 @smallexample
507 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
508 @{ \
509 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
510 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
511 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
512 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
513 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
514 @}
515 @end smallexample
516 @end defmac
517
518 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
519
520 @enumerate
521 @item
522 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
523
524 @item
525 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
526 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
527 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
528
529 @item
530 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
531
532 @item
533 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
534 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
535
536 @item
537 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
538
539 @item
540 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
541
542 @item
543 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
544 compiler.
545 @end enumerate
546
547 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
548
549 @enumerate
550 @item
551 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
552
553 @item
554 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
555 value based on the installed toolchain location.
556
557 @item
558 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
559 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
560
561 @item
562 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
563 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
564
565 @item
566 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
567
568 @item
569 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
570 compiler.
571
572 @item
573 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
574 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
575
576 @item
577 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
578 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
579
580 @item
581 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
582 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
583 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
584
585 @item
586 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
587 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
588 @file{/lib/}.
589
590 @item
591 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
592 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
593 @file{/usr/lib/}.
594 @end enumerate
595
596 @node Run-time Target
597 @section Run-time Target Specification
598 @cindex run-time target specification
599 @cindex predefined macros
600 @cindex target specifications
601
602 @c prevent bad page break with this line
603 Here are run-time target specifications.
604
605 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
606 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
607 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
608 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
609 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
610 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
611 finished command line option processing your code can use those
612 results freely.
613
614 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
615 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
616 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
617 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
618
619 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
620 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
621 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
622 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
623 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
624 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
625 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
626 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
627 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
628 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
629
630 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
631 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
632 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
633 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
634 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
635 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
636 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
637 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
638 preprocessing.
639 @end defmac
640
641 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
642 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
643 and is used for the target operating system instead.
644 @end defmac
645
646 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
647 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
648 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
649 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
650 it yourself.
651 @end defmac
652
653 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
654 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
655 any target-specific headers.
656 @end deftypevar
657
658 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
659 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
660 Its default setting is 0.
661 @end deftypevr
662
663 @cindex optional hardware or system features
664 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
665
666 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
667 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
668 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
669 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
670 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
671 definition does nothing but return true.
672
673 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
674 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
675 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
676 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
677 via attributes).
678 @end deftypefn
679
680 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
681 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
682 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
683 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
684 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
685 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
686 default definition does nothing but return false.
687
688 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
689 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
690 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
691 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
692 @end deftypefn
693
694 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
695
696 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
697
698 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
699
700 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
701
702 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
703
704 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
705
706 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
707 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
708 but is only used in the C
709 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
710 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
711 frontends.
712 @end defmac
713
714 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
715 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
716 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
717 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
718 options are processed once
719 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
720 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
721 options passed explicitly.
722
723 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
724 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
725 @code{optimize} attribute.
726 @end deftypevr
727
728 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
729
730 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
731
732 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
733 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
734 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
735 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
736 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
737 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
738
739 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
740 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
741 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
742 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
743 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
744 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
745 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
746
747 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
748 is 0.
749 @end defmac
750
751 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
752
753 @node Per-Function Data
754 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
755 @cindex per-function data
756 @cindex data structures
757
758 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
759 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
760 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
761 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
762 when another one comes along.
763
764 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
765 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
766 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
767 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
768 to their own specific data.
769
770 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
771 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
772 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
773 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
774
775 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
776 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
777 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
778 function, for level 0.
779
780 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
781 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
782 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
783 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
784 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
785 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
786 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
787 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
788 longer supported.
789
790 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
791 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
792 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
793 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
794 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
795 @end defmac
796
797 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
798 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
799 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
800 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
801 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
802 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
803
804 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
805 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
806 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
807 @end deftypevar
808
809 @node Storage Layout
810 @section Storage Layout
811 @cindex storage layout
812
813 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
814 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
815 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
816 @xref{Run-time Target}.
817
818 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
819 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
820 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
821 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
822 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
823 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
824 macro need not be a constant.
825
826 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
827 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
828 @end defmac
829
830 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
831 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
832 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
833 @end defmac
834
835 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
836 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
837 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
838 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
839 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
840 macro need not be a constant.
841 @end defmac
842
843 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
844 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
845 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
846 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
847 the order of words in memory.
848 @end defmac
849
850 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
851 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
852 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
853 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
854 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
855
856 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
857 multi-word integers.
858 @end defmac
859
860 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
861 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
862 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
863 @end defmac
864
865 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
866 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
867 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
868 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
869 @end defmac
870
871 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
872 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
873 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
874 @end defmac
875
876 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
877 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
878 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
879 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
880 @end defmac
881
882 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
883 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
884 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
885 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
886 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
887 @end defmac
888
889 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
890 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
891 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
892 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
893 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
894 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
895 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
896
897 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
898 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
899 @end defmac
900
901 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
902 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
903 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
904 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
905 scalar type.
906
907 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
908 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
909 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
910 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
911 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
912 counterparts.
913
914 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
915 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
916 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
917 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
918 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
919 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
920
921 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
922 @end defmac
923
924 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
925
926 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
927 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
928 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
929 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
930 size of an integer.
931 @end defmac
932
933 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
934 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
935 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
936 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
937 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
938 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
939 @end defmac
940
941 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
942 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
943 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
944 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
945 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
946 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
947 @end defmac
948
949 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
950 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
951 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
952 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
953 @end defmac
954
955 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
956 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
957 @end defmac
958
959 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
960 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
961 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
962 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
963 @end defmac
964
965 @hook TARGET_ABSOLUTE_BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
966
967 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
968 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
969 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
970 @end defmac
971
972 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
973 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
974 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
975 @end defmac
976
977 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
978 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
979 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
980 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
981 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
982 @end defmac
983
984 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
985 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
986 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
987 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
988 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
989 @end defmac
990
991 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
992 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
993 alignment computed in the usual way (including applying of
994 @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
995 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
996 field alignment has not been set by the
997 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
998 @end defmac
999
1000 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
1001 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
1002 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
1003
1004 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1005
1006 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1007 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1008 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1009 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1010 @end defmac
1011
1012 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1013 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1014 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1015 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1016 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1017
1018 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1019 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1020 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1021 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1022 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1023 @end defmac
1024
1025 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1026 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1027 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1028 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1029 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1030
1031 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1032
1033 @findex strcpy
1034 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1035 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1036 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1037 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1038 @end defmac
1039
1040 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1041 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1042 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1043 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1044 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1045
1046 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1047 @end defmac
1048
1049 @defmac CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
1050 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
1051 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
1052 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
1053 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1054 align the object.
1055
1056 The default definition just returns @var{basic-align}.
1057
1058 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
1059 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1060 constants can be done inline.
1061 @end defmac
1062
1063 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1064 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1065 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1066 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1067 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1068
1069 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1070
1071 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1072 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1073
1074 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1075 @end defmac
1076
1077 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1078
1079 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1080 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1081 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1082 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1083 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1084 align the slot.
1085
1086 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1087 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1088 be used.
1089
1090 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1091 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1092
1093 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1094 @end defmac
1095
1096 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1097 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1098 variable @var{decl}.
1099
1100 If this macro is not defined, then
1101 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1102 is used.
1103
1104 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1105 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1106
1107 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1108 @end defmac
1109
1110 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1111 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1112 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1113 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1114
1115 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1116 @end defmac
1117
1118 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1119 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1120 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1121
1122 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1123 @end defmac
1124
1125 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1126 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1127 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1128
1129 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1130 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1131 @end defmac
1132
1133 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1134 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1135 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1136 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1137 @end defmac
1138
1139 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1140 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1141 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1142
1143 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1144 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1145 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1146 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1147 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1148
1149 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1150 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1151 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1152 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1153
1154 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1155 structure.
1156
1157 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1158 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1159
1160 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1161 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1162 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1163 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1164
1165 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1166 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1167 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1168
1169 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1170 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1171 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1172
1173 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1174 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1175 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1176
1177 @smallexample
1178 struct foo1
1179 @{
1180 char x;
1181 char :0;
1182 char y;
1183 @};
1184
1185 struct foo2
1186 @{
1187 char x;
1188 int :0;
1189 char y;
1190 @};
1191
1192 main ()
1193 @{
1194 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1195 sizeof (struct foo1));
1196 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1197 sizeof (struct foo2));
1198 exit (0);
1199 @}
1200 @end smallexample
1201
1202 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1203 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1204 @end defmac
1205
1206 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1207 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1208 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1209 @end defmac
1210
1211 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1212
1213 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1214
1215 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1216
1217 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1218 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1219 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1220 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1221 @var{specified}.
1222
1223 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1224 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1225 @end defmac
1226
1227 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1228 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1229 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1230 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1231 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1232 (DImode)} is assumed.
1233 @end defmac
1234
1235 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1236 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1237 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1238 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1239 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1240 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1241 having its mode specified.
1242
1243 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1244 would most commonly define this macro if the
1245 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1246 64-bit mode.
1247 @end defmac
1248
1249 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1250 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1251 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1252 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1253
1254 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1255 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1256 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1257 @end defmac
1258
1259 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1260
1261 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1262
1263 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1264
1265 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1266
1267 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1268
1269 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1270
1271 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1272
1273 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1274
1275 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1276
1277 @node Type Layout
1278 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1279
1280 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1281 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1282 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1283 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1284
1285 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1286 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1287 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1288 @end defmac
1289
1290 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1291 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1292 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1293 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1294 unit.)
1295 @end defmac
1296
1297 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1298 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1299 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1300 @end defmac
1301
1302 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1303 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1304 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1305 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1306 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1307 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1308 @end defmac
1309
1310 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1311 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1312 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1313 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1314 macro must be at least 64.
1315 @end defmac
1316
1317 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1318 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1319 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1320 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1321 @end defmac
1322
1323 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1324 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1325 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1326 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1327 @end defmac
1328
1329 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1330 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1331 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1332 @end defmac
1333
1334 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1335 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1336 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1337 words.
1338 @end defmac
1339
1340 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1341 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1342 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1343 words.
1344 @end defmac
1345
1346 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1347 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1348 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1349 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1350 @end defmac
1351
1352 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1353 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1354 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1355 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1356 @end defmac
1357
1358 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1359 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1360 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1361 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1362 @end defmac
1363
1364 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1365 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1366 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1367 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1368 @end defmac
1369
1370 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1371 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1372 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1373 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1374 @end defmac
1375
1376 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1377 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1378 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1379 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1380 @end defmac
1381
1382 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1383 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1384 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1385 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1386 @end defmac
1387
1388 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1389 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1390 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1391 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1392 @end defmac
1393
1394 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1395 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1396 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1397 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1398 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1399 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1400 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1401 @end defmac
1402
1403 @defmac TARGET_FLT_EVAL_METHOD
1404 A C expression for the value for @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} in @file{float.h},
1405 assuming, if applicable, that the floating-point control word is in its
1406 default state. If you do not define this macro the value of
1407 @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} will be zero.
1408 @end defmac
1409
1410 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1411 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1412 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1413 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1414 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1415 is the default.
1416 @end defmac
1417
1418 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1419 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1420 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1421 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1422 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1423 @end defmac
1424
1425 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1426
1427 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1428 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1429 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1430 contents of the string.
1431
1432 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1433 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1434 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1435 of the data type names defined in the function
1436 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1437 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1438 compiler to crash on startup.
1439
1440 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1441 int"}.
1442 @end defmac
1443
1444 @defmac SIZETYPE
1445 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1446 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1447 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1448 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1449 is extracted.
1450
1451 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1452
1453 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1454 @end defmac
1455
1456 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1457 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1458 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1459 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1460 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1461
1462 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1463 @end defmac
1464
1465 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1466 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1467 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1468 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1469 information.
1470
1471 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1472 @end defmac
1473
1474 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1475 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1476 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1477 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1478 @end defmac
1479
1480 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1481 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1482 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1483 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1484 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1485 information.
1486
1487 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1488 @end defmac
1489
1490 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1491 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1492 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1493 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1494 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1495
1496 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1497 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1498 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1499 @end defmac
1500
1501 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1502 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1503 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1504 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1505 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1506
1507 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1508 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1509 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1510 int}.
1511 @end defmac
1512
1513 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1514 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1515 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1516 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1517 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1518 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1519 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1520 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1521 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1522 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1523 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1524 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1525 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1526 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1527 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1528 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1529 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1530 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1531 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1532 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1533 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1534 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1535 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1536 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1537 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1538 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1539 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1540 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1541 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1542 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1543 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1544 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1545 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1546 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1547 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1548 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1549 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1550
1551 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1552 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1553 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1554 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1555 these macros are null pointers.
1556 @end defmac
1557
1558 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1559 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1560 that looks like:
1561
1562 @smallexample
1563 struct @{
1564 union @{
1565 void (*fn)();
1566 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1567 @};
1568 ptrdiff_t delta;
1569 @};
1570 @end smallexample
1571
1572 @noindent
1573 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1574 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1575 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1576 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1577 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1578 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1579 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1580 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1581
1582 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1583 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1584 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1585 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1586 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1587 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1588 architecture, you should define this macro to
1589 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1590
1591 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1592 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1593 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1594 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1595 @end defmac
1596
1597 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1598 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1599 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1600 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1601 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1602 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1603 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1604
1605 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1606 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1607 @end defmac
1608
1609 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1610 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1611 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1612 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1613 when special alignment is necessary. */
1614 @end defmac
1615
1616 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1617 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1618 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1619 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1620 of words in each data entry.
1621 @end defmac
1622
1623 @node Registers
1624 @section Register Usage
1625 @cindex register usage
1626
1627 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1628 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1629
1630 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1631 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1632 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1633 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1634 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1635
1636 @menu
1637 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1638 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1639 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1640 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1641 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1642 @end menu
1643
1644 @node Register Basics
1645 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1646
1647 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1648 Registers have various characteristics.
1649
1650 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1651 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1652 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1653 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1654 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1655 @end defmac
1656
1657 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1658 @cindex fixed register
1659 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1660 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1661 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1662 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1663 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1664 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1665 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1666
1667 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1668 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1669 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1670
1671 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1672 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1673 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1674 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1675 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1676 @end defmac
1677
1678 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1679 @cindex call-used register
1680 @cindex call-clobbered register
1681 @cindex call-saved register
1682 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1683 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1684 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1685 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1686 function calls.
1687
1688 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1689 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1690 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1691 @end defmac
1692
1693 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1694 @cindex call-used register
1695 @cindex call-clobbered register
1696 @cindex call-saved register
1697 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1698 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1699 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1700 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1701 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1702 @end defmac
1703
1704 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1705 @cindex call-used register
1706 @cindex call-clobbered register
1707 @cindex call-saved register
1708 A C expression that is nonzero if it is not permissible to store a
1709 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1710 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1711 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1712 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1713 @end defmac
1714
1715 @findex fixed_regs
1716 @findex call_used_regs
1717 @findex global_regs
1718 @findex reg_names
1719 @findex reg_class_contents
1720 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1721
1722 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1723 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1724 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1725 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1726 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1727 outbound register.
1728 @end defmac
1729
1730 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1731 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1732 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1733 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1734 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1735 register.
1736 @end defmac
1737
1738 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1739 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1740 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1741 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1742 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1743 gotos.
1744 @end defmac
1745
1746 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1747 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1748 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1749 @end defmac
1750
1751 @node Allocation Order
1752 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1753 @cindex order of register allocation
1754 @cindex register allocation order
1755
1756 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1757 Registers are allocated in order.
1758
1759 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1760 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1761 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1762 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1763
1764 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1765 (all else being equal).
1766
1767 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1768 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1769 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1770 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1771 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1772 @end defmac
1773
1774 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1775 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1776 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1777
1778 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1779 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1780 register; and so on.
1781
1782 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1783 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1784
1785 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1786 @end defmac
1787
1788 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1789 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1790 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1791 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1792 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1793 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1794 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1795 @end defmac
1796
1797 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1798 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1799 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1800 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1801 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1802 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1803 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1804 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1805
1806 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1807 @end defmac
1808
1809 @node Values in Registers
1810 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1811
1812 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1813 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1814 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1815
1816 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1817 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1818 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1819 @var{mode}. This macro must never return zero, even if a register
1820 cannot hold the requested mode - indicate that with HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1821 and/or CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS instead.
1822
1823 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1824 definition of this macro is
1825
1826 @smallexample
1827 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1828 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1829 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
1830 @end smallexample
1831 @end defmac
1832
1833 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1834 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1835 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1836 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1837 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1838 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1839 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1840
1841 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1842 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1843 nonzero.
1844
1845 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1846 @code{subreg_get_info}
1847 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1848 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1849 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1850 registers and so not be representable.
1851 @end defmac
1852
1853 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1854 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1855 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1856 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1857 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1858 @end defmac
1859
1860 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1861 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1862 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1863 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1864 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1865 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1866 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1867 @end defmac
1868
1869 @defmac HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1870 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1871 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1872 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1873 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1874
1875 @smallexample
1876 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1877 @end smallexample
1878
1879 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1880 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1881
1882 @cindex register pairs
1883 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1884 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1885 odd register numbers for such modes.
1886
1887 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1888 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1889 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1890 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1891
1892 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1893 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1894 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1895 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1896 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1897 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1898 to be tieable.
1899
1900 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1901 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1902 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1903 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1904 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1905 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1906
1907 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1908 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1909 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1910 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1911 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1912 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1913 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1914 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1915 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1916
1917 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1918 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1919 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1920 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1921 constraints for those instructions.
1922
1923 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1924 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1925 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1926 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1927 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1928 @end defmac
1929
1930 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1931 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1932 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1933
1934 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1935 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1936 handler.
1937
1938 The default is always nonzero.
1939 @end defmac
1940
1941 @defmac MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1942 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1943 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1944
1945 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1946 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1947 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1948 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1949 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1950 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1951
1952 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1953 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
1954 allocation.
1955 @end defmac
1956
1957 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1958
1959 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1960 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1961 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1962 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1963 @end defmac
1964
1965 @node Leaf Functions
1966 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1967
1968 @cindex leaf functions
1969 @cindex functions, leaf
1970 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1971 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1972 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1973 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1974 normally arrive.
1975
1976 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1977 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1978 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1979 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1980 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1981 functions''.
1982
1983 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1984 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1985 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1986 accomplish this.
1987
1988 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1989 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1990 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1991 function treatment.
1992
1993 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1994 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1995 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1996 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1997 in this vector.
1998
1999 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
2000 the treatment of leaf functions.
2001 @end defmac
2002
2003 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
2004 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
2005 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
2006
2007 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
2008 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
2009 will cause the compiler to abort.
2010
2011 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
2012 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
2013 this.
2014 @end defmac
2015
2016 @findex current_function_is_leaf
2017 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
2018 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
2019 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
2020 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
2021 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
2022 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
2023 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
2024 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
2025 functions which only use leaf registers.
2026 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
2027 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
2028 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
2029 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
2030 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
2031
2032 @node Stack Registers
2033 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
2034
2035 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
2036 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
2037 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
2038 stack.
2039
2040 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
2041 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
2042 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
2043 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
2044 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
2045 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
2046 with it, as well as defining these macros.
2047
2048 @defmac STACK_REGS
2049 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
2050 @end defmac
2051
2052 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
2053 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
2054 the machine has any stack-like registers.
2055 @end defmac
2056
2057 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
2058 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
2059 of the stack.
2060 @end defmac
2061
2062 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
2063 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
2064 the stack.
2065 @end defmac
2066
2067 @node Register Classes
2068 @section Register Classes
2069 @cindex register class definitions
2070 @cindex class definitions, register
2071
2072 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
2073 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
2074 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
2075 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
2076
2077 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
2078 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
2079 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
2080
2081 @findex ALL_REGS
2082 @findex NO_REGS
2083 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
2084 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
2085 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
2086 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
2087
2088 @findex GENERAL_REGS
2089 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
2090 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
2091 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
2092 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
2093 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
2094
2095 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2096 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2097
2098 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2099 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2100 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2101 them in operand constraints.
2102
2103 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2104 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2105 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2106 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2107 (@pxref{Costs}).
2108
2109 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2110 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2111 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2112 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2113 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2114 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2115 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2116
2117 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2118 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2119 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2120 in their union.
2121
2122 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2123 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2124 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2125 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2126 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2127
2128 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2129 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2130 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2131 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2132 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2133 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2134 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2135 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2136 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2137
2138 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2139 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2140 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2141 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2142 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2143 tells how many classes there are.
2144
2145 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2146 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2147 in many of the tables described below.
2148 @end deftp
2149
2150 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2151 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2152
2153 @smallexample
2154 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2155 @end smallexample
2156 @end defmac
2157
2158 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2159 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2160 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2161 @end defmac
2162
2163 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2164 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2165 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2166 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2167 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2168
2169 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2170 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2171 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2172 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2173 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2174 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2175 so on.
2176 @end defmac
2177
2178 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2179 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2180 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2181 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2182 register.
2183 @end defmac
2184
2185 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2186 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2187 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2188 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2189 @end defmac
2190
2191 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2192 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2193 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2194 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2195 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2196 @end defmac
2197
2198 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2199 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2200 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2201 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2202 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2203 @end defmac
2204
2205 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2206 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2207 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2208 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2209 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2210 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2211 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2212 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2213 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2214 @end defmac
2215
2216 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2217 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2218 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2219 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2220 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2221 @end defmac
2222
2223 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2224 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2225 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2226 @end defmac
2227
2228 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2229 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2230 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2231 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2232 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2233 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2234 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2235 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2236 @code{address_operand}.
2237 @end defmac
2238
2239 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2240 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2241 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2242 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2243 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2244 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2245 than other base register uses.
2246
2247 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2248 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2249 @end defmac
2250
2251 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2252 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2253 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2254 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2255 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2256 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2257 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2258 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2259 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2260 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2261 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2262 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2263 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2264 @end defmac
2265
2266 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2267 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2268 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2269 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2270 allocated such a hard register.
2271
2272 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2273 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2274 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2275 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2276 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2277 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2278 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2279 only if neither labeling works.
2280 @end defmac
2281
2282 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2283
2284 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2285
2286 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2287 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2288 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2289 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2290 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2291 safe:
2292
2293 @smallexample
2294 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2295 @end smallexample
2296
2297 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2298 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2299 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2300 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2301 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2302
2303 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2304 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2305 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2306 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2307 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2308 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2309 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2310 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant can't be loaded
2311 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2312 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2313 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2314
2315 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2316 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2317 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2318 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2319 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2320 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2321 @end defmac
2322
2323 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2324
2325 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2326 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2327 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2328 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2329 ordinarily be used.
2330
2331 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2332 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
2333
2334 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2335 smaller class.
2336
2337 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2338 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2339 @end defmac
2340
2341 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2342
2343 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2344 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2345 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2346 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2347 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2348
2349 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2350 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2351 reload phase that it may
2352 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2353 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2354 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2355 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2356 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2357 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2358
2359 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2360 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2361 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2362 class required. If the
2363 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2364 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2365 macros identically.
2366
2367 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2368 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2369 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2370 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2371 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2372
2373 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2374 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2375 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2376 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2377 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2378 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2379 register.
2380
2381 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2382 register that
2383 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2384 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2385 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2386 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2387 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2388
2389 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2390 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2391 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2392 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2393
2394 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2395 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2396 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2397 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2398 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2399 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2400 general registers.
2401 @end defmac
2402
2403 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
2404 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2405 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
2406 those machines to be a C expression that is nonzero if objects of mode
2407 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2408 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2409 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2410
2411 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2412 @end defmac
2413
2414 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2415 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2416 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2417 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2418 defined by this macro.
2419
2420 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2421 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2422 @end defmac
2423
2424 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2425 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2426 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2427 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2428 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2429 same as that of @var{mode}.
2430
2431 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2432 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2433 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2434 registers.
2435
2436 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2437 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2438 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2439 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2440 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2441 details.
2442
2443 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2444 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2445 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2446 @end defmac
2447
2448 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2449
2450 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2451
2452 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2453 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2454 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2455
2456 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2457 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2458 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2459 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2460
2461 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2462 in the reload pass.
2463 @end defmac
2464
2465 @defmac CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (@var{from}, @var{to}, @var{class})
2466 If defined, a C expression that returns nonzero for a @var{class} for which
2467 a change from mode @var{from} to mode @var{to} is invalid.
2468
2469 For example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2470 floating-point registers on Alpha extends them to 64 bits.
2471 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2472 does not store the low-order 32 bits, as would be the case for a normal
2473 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS}
2474 as below:
2475
2476 @smallexample
2477 #define CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS(FROM, TO, CLASS) \
2478 (GET_MODE_SIZE (FROM) != GET_MODE_SIZE (TO) \
2479 ? reg_classes_intersect_p (FLOAT_REGS, (CLASS)) : 0)
2480 @end smallexample
2481
2482 Even if storing from a register in mode @var{to} would be valid,
2483 if both @var{from} and @code{raw_reg_mode} for @var{class} are wider
2484 than @code{word_mode}, then we must prevent @var{to} narrowing the
2485 mode. This happens when the middle-end assumes that it can load
2486 or store pieces of an @var{N}-word pseudo, and that the pseudo will
2487 eventually be allocated to @var{N} @code{word_mode} hard registers.
2488 Failure to prevent this kind of mode change will result in the
2489 entire @code{raw_reg_mode} being modified instead of the partial
2490 value that the middle-end intended.
2491
2492 @end defmac
2493
2494 @hook TARGET_IRA_CHANGE_PSEUDO_ALLOCNO_CLASS
2495
2496 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2497
2498 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2499
2500 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2501
2502 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2503
2504 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2505
2506 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS_DISPLACEMENT
2507
2508 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2509
2510 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2511
2512 @node Stack and Calling
2513 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2514 @cindex calling conventions
2515
2516 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2517 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2518
2519 @menu
2520 * Frame Layout::
2521 * Exception Handling::
2522 * Stack Checking::
2523 * Frame Registers::
2524 * Elimination::
2525 * Stack Arguments::
2526 * Register Arguments::
2527 * Scalar Return::
2528 * Aggregate Return::
2529 * Caller Saves::
2530 * Function Entry::
2531 * Profiling::
2532 * Tail Calls::
2533 * Shrink-wrapping separate components::
2534 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2535 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2536 @end menu
2537
2538 @node Frame Layout
2539 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2540 @cindex stack frame layout
2541 @cindex frame layout
2542
2543 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2544 Here is the basic stack layout.
2545
2546 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2547 Define this macro to be true if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2548 pointer to a smaller address, and false otherwise.
2549 @end defmac
2550
2551 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2552 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2553 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2554 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2555
2556 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2557 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2558 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2559 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2560 space for the next item on the stack.
2561
2562 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2563 true, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2564 which is often wrong.
2565 @end defmac
2566
2567 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2568 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2569 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2570 @end defmac
2571
2572 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2573 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2574 addresses on the stack.
2575 @end defmac
2576
2577 @defmac STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2578 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2579
2580 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2581 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2582 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2583 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2584 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2585 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2586 @end defmac
2587
2588 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2589 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2590 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2591
2592 On ports where @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2593 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2594 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2595 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2596 @end defmac
2597
2598 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2599 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2600 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2601 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2602
2603 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2604 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2605 @end defmac
2606
2607 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2608 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2609 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2610 function.
2611
2612 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2613 the first argument's address.
2614 @end defmac
2615
2616 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2617 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2618 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2619
2620 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2621 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2622 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2623 @end defmac
2624
2625 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2626 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2627 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2628 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2629 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2630 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2631 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2632 @end defmac
2633
2634 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2635 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2636 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2637 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2638 itself.
2639
2640 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2641 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2642 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2643 @end defmac
2644
2645 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2646 A C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2647 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2648 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2649 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2650 define this macro. The default is to do nothing.
2651 @end defmac
2652
2653 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2654
2655 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2656 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2657 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2658 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2659 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2660 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2661 @end defmac
2662
2663 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2664 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2665 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2666 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2667 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2668 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is nonzero.
2669
2670 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2671 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2672 determine the return address of other frames.
2673 @end defmac
2674
2675 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2676 Define this macro to nonzero value if the return address of a particular
2677 stack frame is accessed from the frame pointer of the previous stack
2678 frame. The zero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2679 @end defmac
2680
2681 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2682 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2683 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2684 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2685 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2686 the stack.
2687
2688 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2689 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2690
2691 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2692 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2693 @end defmac
2694
2695 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2696 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2697 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2698 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2699 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2700
2701 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2702 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2703 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2704 over time.
2705 @end defmac
2706
2707 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2708 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2709 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2710 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2711 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2712 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2713 @end defmac
2714
2715 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2716
2717 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2718 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2719 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2720 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2721 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2722 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2723
2724 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2725 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2726 @end defmac
2727
2728 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2729 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2730 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2731 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2732 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2733 during virtual register instantiation.
2734
2735 The default value for this macro is
2736 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2737 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2738 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2739 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2740 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2741
2742 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2743 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2744 DWARF 2.
2745 @end defmac
2746
2747 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2748 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2749 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2750 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2751 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2752
2753 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2754 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2755 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2756 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2757 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2758 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2759 should be defined.
2760 @end defmac
2761
2762 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2763 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2764 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2765 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2766 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2767 @end defmac
2768
2769 @node Exception Handling
2770 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2771 @cindex exception handling
2772
2773 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2774 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2775 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2776 @var{N} registers are usable.
2777
2778 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2779 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2780 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2781 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2782 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2783
2784 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2785 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2786 @end defmac
2787
2788 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2789 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2790 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2791 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2792 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2793
2794 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2795 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2796
2797 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2798 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2799 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2800 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2801 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2802 that provided by DWARF 2.
2803 @end defmac
2804
2805 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2806 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2807 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2808 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2809
2810 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2811 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2812 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2813 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2814 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2815 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2816 target call frame.
2817
2818 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2819 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2820 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2821
2822 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2823 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2824 @end defmac
2825
2826 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2827 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2828 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2829 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2830 using it to return to the exception handler.
2831 @end defmac
2832
2833 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2834 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2835 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2836 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2837 and so may be read-only.
2838
2839 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2840 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2841 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2842 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2843
2844 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2845 represented directly.
2846 @end defmac
2847
2848 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2849 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2850 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2851 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2852 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2853
2854 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2855 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2856 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2857 to be emitted.
2858 @end defmac
2859
2860 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2861 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2862 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2863 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2864 through signal frames.
2865
2866 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2867 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2868 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2869 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2870 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2871 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2872 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2873 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2874 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2875
2876 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2877 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2878 @end defmac
2879
2880 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2881 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2882 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2883 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2884
2885 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2886 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2887 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2888 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2889 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2890 be updated in @var{fs}.
2891 @end defmac
2892
2893 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2894 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2895 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2896 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2897 @end defmac
2898
2899 @node Stack Checking
2900 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2901
2902 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2903 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2904 three ways:
2905
2906 @enumerate
2907 @item
2908 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2909 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2910 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2911 other special processing.
2912
2913 @item
2914 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2915 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2916 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2917 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2918 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2919 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2920 approach below.
2921
2922 @item
2923 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2924 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2925 @end enumerate
2926
2927 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2928 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2929 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2930 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2931
2932 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2933 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2934 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2935 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2936 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2937 value of this macro is zero.
2938 @end defmac
2939
2940 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2941 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2942 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2943 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2944 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2945 @end defmac
2946
2947 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2948 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2949 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2950 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2951 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2952 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2953 @end defmac
2954
2955 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2956 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2957 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2958 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2959 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2960 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2961 default value of this macro is zero.
2962 @end defmac
2963
2964 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2965 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2966 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 4KB/8KB
2967 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2968 8KB/12KB with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for most
2969 architectures and operating systems.
2970 @end defmac
2971
2972 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2973 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2974 in the opposite case.
2975
2976 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2977 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2978 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2979 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2980 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2981 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2982 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2983 @end defmac
2984
2985 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2986 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2987 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2988 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2989 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2990 use the default of four words.
2991 @end defmac
2992
2993 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2994 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2995 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2996 @option{-fstack-check}.
2997 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2998 normally not need to override that default.
2999 @end defmac
3000
3001 @need 2000
3002 @node Frame Registers
3003 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
3004
3005 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3006 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
3007
3008 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
3009 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
3010 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
3011 the hardware determines which register this is.
3012 @end defmac
3013
3014 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3015 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
3016 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
3017 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
3018 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
3019 @end defmac
3020
3021 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3022 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
3023 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
3024 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
3025 between these two locations). On those machines, define
3026 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
3027 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
3028 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
3029 used for the frame pointer.
3030
3031 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
3032 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
3033 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
3034 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
3035 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
3036 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
3037 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3038
3039 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
3040 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3041 @end defmac
3042
3043 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
3044 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
3045 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
3046 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
3047 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
3048 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
3049 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
3050 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
3051 (@pxref{Elimination}).
3052 @end defmac
3053
3054 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
3055 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3056 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
3057 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3058 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3059 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3060 @end defmac
3061
3062 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
3063 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3064 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
3065 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
3066 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3067 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3068 @end defmac
3069
3070 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
3071 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
3072 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
3073 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
3074 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
3075 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
3076 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
3077
3078 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
3079 address from the stack.
3080 @end defmac
3081
3082 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
3083 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
3084 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
3085 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
3086 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
3087 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
3088 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
3089 not be defined.
3090
3091 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
3092
3093 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
3094 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
3095 @end defmac
3096
3097 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
3098
3099 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3100 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
3101 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
3102 DWARF2 exception handling.
3103
3104 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
3105 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
3106 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
3107 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
3108 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
3109 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
3110 registers that are not call-saved.
3111
3112 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3113 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
3114 @end defmac
3115
3116 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3117
3118 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
3119 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
3120
3121 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3122 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
3123 @end defmac
3124
3125 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
3126
3127 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3128 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
3129 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
3130 column number to use instead.
3131
3132 See the PowerPC's SPE target for an example.
3133 @end defmac
3134
3135 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
3136
3137 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3138 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
3139 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
3140 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
3141 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
3142
3143 @end defmac
3144
3145 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3146
3147 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3148 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3149 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3150 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
3151 return @code{@var{regno}}.
3152
3153 @end defmac
3154
3155 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3156
3157 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3158 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3159 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3160 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3161
3162 @end defmac
3163
3164 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3165
3166 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3167 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3168 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3169 defined and 0 otherwise.
3170
3171 @end defmac
3172
3173 @node Elimination
3174 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3175
3176 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3177 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3178
3179 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3180
3181 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3182 This macro specifies a table of register pairs used to eliminate
3183 unneeded registers that point into the stack frame.
3184
3185 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3186 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3187
3188 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3189 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3190 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3191 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3192 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3193
3194 In this case, you might specify:
3195 @smallexample
3196 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3197 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3198 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3199 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3200 @end smallexample
3201
3202 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3203 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3204 @end defmac
3205
3206 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3207
3208 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3209 This macro returns the initial difference between the specified pair
3210 of registers. The value would be computed from information
3211 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3212 registers @code{df_regs_ever_live_p} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3213 @end defmac
3214
3215 @node Stack Arguments
3216 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3217 @cindex arguments on stack
3218 @cindex stack arguments
3219
3220 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3221 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3222 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3223
3224 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3225
3226 @defmac PUSH_ARGS
3227 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3228 outgoing arguments.
3229 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3230 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3231 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3232 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3233 @end defmac
3234
3235 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3236 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3237 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3238 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3239 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3240 @end defmac
3241
3242 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3243 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3244 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3245
3246 On some machines, the definition
3247
3248 @smallexample
3249 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3250 @end smallexample
3251
3252 @noindent
3253 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3254 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3255 alignment. Then the definition should be
3256
3257 @smallexample
3258 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3259 @end smallexample
3260
3261 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3262 @end defmac
3263
3264 @findex outgoing_args_size
3265 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3266 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3267 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3268 will be computed and placed into
3269 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3270 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3271 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3272
3273 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3274 is not proper.
3275 @end defmac
3276
3277 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3278 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3279 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3280 registers.
3281
3282 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3283 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3284 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3285 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3286 of the function.
3287
3288 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3289 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3290 which.
3291 @end defmac
3292 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3293 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3294
3295 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3296 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3297 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3298 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3299 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3300 @end defmac
3301
3302 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3303 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3304 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3305 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3306 if the function called is a library function.
3307
3308 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3309 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3310 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3311 @end defmac
3312
3313 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3314 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3315 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3316 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3317 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3318
3319 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3320 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3321 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3322 stack in its natural location.
3323 @end defmac
3324
3325 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3326
3327 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3328 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3329 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3330 when compiling a function call.
3331
3332 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3333 have been accumulated.
3334
3335 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3336 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3337 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3338 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3339 appropriate.
3340 @end defmac
3341
3342 @node Register Arguments
3343 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3344 @cindex arguments in registers
3345 @cindex registers arguments
3346
3347 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3348 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3349 the stack.
3350
3351 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3352
3353 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3354
3355 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3356
3357 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3358
3359 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3360
3361 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3362
3363 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3364
3365 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3366
3367 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3368 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3369 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3370 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3371 of bytes of argument so far.
3372
3373 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3374 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3375 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3376 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3377 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3378 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3379 @end defmac
3380
3381 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3382 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3383 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3384 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3385 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3386 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3387 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3388 @end defmac
3389
3390 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3391 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3392 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3393 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3394 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3395 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3396 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3397 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3398 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3399 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3400 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3401 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3402 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3403
3404 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3405 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3406 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3407 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3408 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3409 never both of them at once.
3410 @end defmac
3411
3412 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3413 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3414 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3415 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3416 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3417 0)} is used instead.
3418 @end defmac
3419
3420 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3421 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3422 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3423 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3424
3425 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3426 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3427 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3428 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3429 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3430 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3431 @end defmac
3432
3433 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3434
3435 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3436 If defined, a C expression that is the number of bytes to add to the
3437 offset of the argument passed in memory. This is needed for the SPU,
3438 which passes @code{char} and @code{short} arguments in the preferred
3439 slot that is in the middle of the quad word instead of starting at the
3440 top.
3441 @end defmac
3442
3443 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3444 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
3445 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
3446 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
3447 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
3448
3449 The @emph{amount} of padding is not controlled by this macro, but by the
3450 target hook @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY}. It is
3451 always just enough to reach the next multiple of that boundary.
3452
3453 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
3454 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
3455 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
3456 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
3457 @end defmac
3458
3459 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3460 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3461 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3462 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3463 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3464 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3465 @end defmac
3466
3467 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3468 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3469 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3470 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3471 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3472 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3473 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3474 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3475 required.
3476 @end defmac
3477
3478 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3479
3480 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3481
3482 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3483 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3484 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3485 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3486 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3487 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3488 stack.
3489 @end defmac
3490
3491 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3492
3493 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3494
3495 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3496
3497 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3498
3499 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3500
3501 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3502
3503 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3504
3505 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3506
3507 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3508
3509 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3510
3511 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3512
3513 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3514
3515 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_MODE
3516
3517 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3518
3519 @node Scalar Return
3520 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3521 @cindex return values in registers
3522 @cindex values, returned by functions
3523 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3524
3525 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3526 values---values that can fit in registers.
3527
3528 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3529
3530 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3531 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3532 a new target instead.
3533 @end defmac
3534
3535 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3536 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3537 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3538
3539 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3540 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3541 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3542 compiled.
3543 @end defmac
3544
3545 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3546
3547 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3548 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3549 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3550
3551 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3552 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3553 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3554 suffices:
3555
3556 @smallexample
3557 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3558 @end smallexample
3559
3560 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3561 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3562 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3563
3564 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3565 for a new target instead.
3566 @end defmac
3567
3568 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3569
3570 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3571 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3572 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3573 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3574 @end defmac
3575
3576 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3577
3578 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3579
3580 @node Aggregate Return
3581 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3582 @cindex aggregates as return values
3583 @cindex large return values
3584 @cindex returning aggregate values
3585 @cindex structure value address
3586
3587 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3588 cases), the value is not returned according to
3589 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3590 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3591 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3592 address}.
3593
3594 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3595 memory.
3596
3597 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3598
3599 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3600 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3601 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3602 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3603 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3604 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3605 target hook.
3606
3607 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3608 @end defmac
3609
3610 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3611
3612 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3613 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3614 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3615 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3616
3617 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3618 pass an address to the subroutine.
3619
3620 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3621 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3622 @end defmac
3623
3624 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3625
3626 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3627
3628 @node Caller Saves
3629 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3630
3631 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3632 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3633 must live across calls.
3634
3635 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3636 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3637 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3638 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3639 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3640 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3641 @end defmac
3642
3643 @node Function Entry
3644 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3645 @cindex function entry and exit
3646 @cindex prologue
3647 @cindex epilogue
3648
3649 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3650 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3651
3652 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3653
3654 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3655
3656 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3657
3658 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3659
3660 @itemize @bullet
3661 @item
3662 @findex pretend_args_size
3663 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3664 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3665 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3666 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3667 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3668 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3669 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3670 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3671 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3672 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3673
3674 @item
3675 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3676 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3677 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3678 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3679 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3680 a save area.
3681
3682 @item
3683 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3684 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3685 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3686 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3687
3688 @item
3689 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3690 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3691 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3692 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3693 @end itemize
3694
3695 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3696 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3697 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3698 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3699 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3700 default is 0.
3701
3702 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3703 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3704 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3705 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3706 @end defmac
3707
3708 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3709 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3710 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3711 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3712 @end defmac
3713
3714 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3715 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3716 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3717 on entry to an exception edge.
3718 @end defmac
3719
3720 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3721
3722 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3723
3724 @node Profiling
3725 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3726 @cindex profiling, code generation
3727
3728 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3729
3730 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3731 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3732 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3733
3734 @findex mcount
3735 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3736 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3737 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3738 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3739
3740 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3741 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3742 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3743 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3744 @end defmac
3745
3746 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3747 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3748 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3749 not support profiling.
3750 @end defmac
3751
3752 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3753 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3754 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3755 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3756 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3757 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3758 @end defmac
3759
3760 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3761 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3762 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3763 @end defmac
3764
3765 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3766
3767 @node Tail Calls
3768 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3769 @cindex tail calls
3770
3771 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3772
3773 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3774
3775 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3776
3777 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3778
3779 @node Shrink-wrapping separate components
3780 @subsection Shrink-wrapping separate components
3781 @cindex shrink-wrapping separate components
3782
3783 The prologue may perform a variety of target dependent tasks such as
3784 saving callee-saved registers, saving the return address, aligning the
3785 stack, creating a stack frame, initializing the PIC register, setting
3786 up the static chain, etc.
3787
3788 On some targets some of these tasks may be independent of others and
3789 thus may be shrink-wrapped separately. These independent tasks are
3790 referred to as components and are handled generically by the target
3791 independent parts of GCC.
3792
3793 Using the following hooks those prologue or epilogue components can be
3794 shrink-wrapped separately, so that the initialization (and possibly
3795 teardown) those components do is not done as frequently on execution
3796 paths where this would unnecessary.
3797
3798 What exactly those components are is up to the target code; the generic
3799 code treats them abstractly, as a bit in an @code{sbitmap}. These
3800 @code{sbitmap}s are allocated by the @code{shrink_wrap.get_separate_components}
3801 and @code{shrink_wrap.components_for_bb} hooks, and deallocated by the
3802 generic code.
3803
3804 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_GET_SEPARATE_COMPONENTS
3805
3806 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_COMPONENTS_FOR_BB
3807
3808 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_DISQUALIFY_COMPONENTS
3809
3810 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_PROLOGUE_COMPONENTS
3811
3812 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_EPILOGUE_COMPONENTS
3813
3814 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_SET_HANDLED_COMPONENTS
3815
3816 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3817 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3818 @cindex stack smashing protection
3819
3820 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3821
3822 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3823
3824 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3825
3826 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3827 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3828 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3829
3830 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3831
3832 @node Varargs
3833 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3834 @cindex varargs implementation
3835
3836 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3837 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3838 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3839 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3840 conditionals to include it.
3841
3842 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3843 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3844 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3845 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3846 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3847 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3848
3849 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3850 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3851 below.
3852
3853 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3854 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3855 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3856 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3857 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3858
3859 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3860 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3861 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3862 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3863
3864 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3865 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3866 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3867 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3868 to use them for its own purposes.
3869 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3870 @c 10feb93
3871 @end defmac
3872
3873 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3874 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3875 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3876 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3877 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3878 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3879 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3880 of the current function.
3881 @end defmac
3882
3883 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3884 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3885 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3886 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3887 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3888 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3889
3890 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3891 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3892 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3893
3894 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3895 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3896 @end defmac
3897
3898 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3899
3900 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3901
3902 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3903
3904 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3905
3906 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3907
3908 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3909
3910 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3911
3912 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3913
3914 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3915
3916 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3917
3918 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3919
3920 @hook TARGET_CHKP_FUNCTION_VALUE_BOUNDS
3921
3922 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARG_BOUNDS
3923
3924 @node Trampolines
3925 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3926 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3927 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3928
3929 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3930 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3931 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3932 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3933 trampoline.
3934
3935 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3936 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3937 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3938 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3939 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3940 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3941 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3942 operands.
3943
3944 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3945 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3946 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3947 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3948 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3949 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3950 separately.
3951
3952 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3953
3954 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3955 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3956 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3957 @end defmac
3958
3959 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3960 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3961 @end defmac
3962
3963 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3964 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3965
3966 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3967 is used for aligning trampolines.
3968 @end defmac
3969
3970 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3971
3972 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3973
3974 @hook TARGET_CUSTOM_FUNCTION_DESCRIPTORS
3975
3976 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3977 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3978 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3979 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3980
3981 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3982 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3983 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3984 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3985 latter makes initialization faster.
3986
3987 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3988 the following macro.
3989
3990 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3991 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3992 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3993 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3994 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3995 @end defmac
3996
3997 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3998 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3999 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
4000 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
4001 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
4002
4003 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
4004 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
4005 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
4006 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
4007 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
4008
4009 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
4010 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
4011 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
4012 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
4013 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
4014 special assembler code.
4015 @end defmac
4016
4017 @node Library Calls
4018 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
4019 @cindex library subroutine names
4020 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
4021
4022 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4023 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
4024
4025 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
4026 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
4027 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
4028 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
4029 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
4030 @end defmac
4031
4032 @findex set_optab_libfunc
4033 @findex init_one_libfunc
4034 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
4035
4036 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
4037
4038 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
4039 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
4040 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
4041 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
4042 return a tristate.
4043
4044 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
4045 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
4046 don't need to define this macro.
4047 @end defmac
4048
4049 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
4050 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
4051 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
4052 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
4053 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
4054 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
4055 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
4056 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
4057 @end defmac
4058
4059 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
4060 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
4061 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4062 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
4063 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4064 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
4065 @end defmac
4066
4067 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4068 @findex matherr
4069 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
4070 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4071 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4072 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4073 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4074 system.
4075
4076 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4077 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4078 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4079 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4080 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4081 @end defmac
4082
4083 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4084 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4085 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4086 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4087 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4088 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4089 @end defmac
4090
4091 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
4092
4093 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4094 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
4095 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
4096 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
4097 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
4098 the NeXT runtime installed.
4099
4100 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
4101 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
4102 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4103
4104 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
4105 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
4106 @end defmac
4107
4108 @hook TARGET_PRINTF_POINTER_FORMAT
4109
4110 @node Addressing Modes
4111 @section Addressing Modes
4112 @cindex addressing modes
4113
4114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4115 This is about addressing modes.
4116
4117 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4118 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4119 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4120 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4121 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4122 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4123 @end defmac
4124
4125 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4126 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4127 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4128 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4129 the size of the memory operand.
4130 @end defmac
4131
4132 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4133 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4134 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4135 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4136 @end defmac
4137
4138 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4139 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4140 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4141 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4142 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4143 constant addresses are supported.
4144 @end defmac
4145
4146 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4147 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4148 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4149 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4150 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4151 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4152 @end defmac
4153
4154 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4155 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4156 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4157 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4158 accept.
4159 @end defmac
4160
4161 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4162
4163 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4164 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4165 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4166 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4167 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4168 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4169 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4170 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4171 @code{'m'} constraint.
4172 @end defmac
4173
4174 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4175 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4176 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
4177 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4178 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4179
4180 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4181 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4182
4183 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4184 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4185 @end defmac
4186
4187 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4188
4189 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4190 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4191 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4192 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4193 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4194 performance reasons.
4195
4196 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4197 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4198 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4199 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4200 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4201 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4202 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4203 be shared.
4204
4205 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4206 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4207 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4208 of reload internals.
4209
4210 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4211 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4212 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4213
4214 @findex push_reload
4215 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4216 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4217 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4218
4219 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4220 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4221 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4222 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4223 @code{push_reload}.
4224
4225 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4226 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4227 the address has become legitimate.
4228
4229 @findex copy_rtx
4230 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4231 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4232 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4233 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4234 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4235 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4236 @end defmac
4237
4238 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4239
4240 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4241
4242 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4243
4244 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4245
4246 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4247
4248 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4249
4250 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4251
4252 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4253
4254 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4255
4256 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4257
4258 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4259
4260 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST_OK
4261
4262 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4263
4264 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4265
4266 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MD_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4267
4268 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4269
4270 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4271
4272 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4273
4274 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_GET_MASK_MODE
4275
4276 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4277
4278 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4279
4280 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4281
4282 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4283
4284 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4285
4286 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_SCATTER
4287
4288 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4289
4290 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4291
4292 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4293
4294 @hook TARGET_GOACC_VALIDATE_DIMS
4295
4296 @hook TARGET_GOACC_DIM_LIMIT
4297
4298 @hook TARGET_GOACC_FORK_JOIN
4299
4300 @hook TARGET_GOACC_REDUCTION
4301
4302 @node Anchored Addresses
4303 @section Anchored Addresses
4304 @cindex anchored addresses
4305 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4306
4307 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4308 For example, if we have:
4309
4310 @smallexample
4311 static int a, b, c;
4312 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4313 @end smallexample
4314
4315 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4316 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4317 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4318 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4319 be something like:
4320
4321 @smallexample
4322 int foo (void)
4323 @{
4324 register int *xr = &x;
4325 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4326 @}
4327 @end smallexample
4328
4329 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4330 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4331
4332 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4333 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4334 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4335 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4336
4337 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4338
4339 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4340
4341 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4342
4343 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4344
4345 @node Condition Code
4346 @section Condition Code Status
4347 @cindex condition code status
4348
4349 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4350 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4351
4352 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4353 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4354 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4355 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4356 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4357 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4358 most RISC machines.
4359
4360 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4361 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4362 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4363 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4364 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4365 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4366
4367 These restrictions can prevent important
4368 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4369 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4370 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4371 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4372 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4373
4374 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4375 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4376 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4377 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4378 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4379 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4380 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4381
4382 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4383 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4384 interested in most macros in this section.
4385
4386 @menu
4387 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4388 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4389 @end menu
4390
4391 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4392 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4393 @findex cc0
4394
4395 @findex cc_status
4396 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4397 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4398 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4399 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4400 currently based, and several standard flags.
4401
4402 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4403 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4404 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4405
4406 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4407 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4408 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4409
4410 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4411 @end defmac
4412
4413 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4414 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4415 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4416 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4417 define this macro to initialize it.
4418
4419 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4420 @end defmac
4421
4422 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4423 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4424 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4425 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4426 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4427 set @code{(cc0)}.
4428
4429 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4430
4431 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4432 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4433 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4434 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4435 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4436 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4437 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4438 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4439 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4440 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4441 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4442 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4443 condition code value.
4444
4445 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4446 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4447 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4448 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4449 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4450 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4451 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4452
4453 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4454 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4455 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4456 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4457 @end defmac
4458
4459 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4460 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4461 @findex CCmode
4462 @findex MODE_CC
4463
4464 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4465 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4466 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4467 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4468 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4469 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4470 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4471 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4472 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4473 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4474 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4475
4476 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4477 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4478 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4479 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4480 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4481 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4482 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4483
4484 @smallexample
4485 (define_insn ""
4486 [(set (reg:CCNZ 0)
4487 (compare:CCNZ
4488 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4489 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4490 (const_int 0)))]
4491 ""
4492 "@dots{}")
4493 @end smallexample
4494
4495 @noindent
4496 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CCNZmode}
4497 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4498
4499 @smallexample
4500 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4501 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4502 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4503 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4504 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4505 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4506 ? CCNZmode : CCmode))
4507 @end smallexample
4508
4509 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4510 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4511 this section.
4512
4513 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4514 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4515 @end defmac
4516
4517 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4518
4519 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4520 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4521 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4522 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4523 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4524
4525 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4526 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4527 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4528 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4529
4530 @smallexample
4531 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4532 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4533 @end smallexample
4534 @end defmac
4535
4536 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4537 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4538 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4539 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4540 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4541 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4542 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4543 like:
4544
4545 @smallexample
4546 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4547 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4548 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4549 @end smallexample
4550 @end defmac
4551
4552 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4553
4554 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4555
4556 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4557
4558 @node Costs
4559 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4560 @cindex costs of instructions
4561 @cindex relative costs
4562 @cindex speed of instructions
4563
4564 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4565 on the target machine.
4566
4567 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4568 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4569 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4570 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4571 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4572 that.
4573
4574 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4575 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4576 registers if they are not general registers.
4577
4578 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4579 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4580 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4581 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4582 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4583 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4584
4585 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4586 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4587 @end defmac
4588
4589 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4590
4591 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4592 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4593 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4594 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4595 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4596 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4597 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4598
4599 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4600 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4601 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4602 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4603 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4604 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4605
4606 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4607 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4608 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4609 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4610 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4611 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4612 are the same as to this macro.
4613
4614 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4615 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4616 @end defmac
4617
4618 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4619
4620 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4621 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4622 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4623 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4624 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4625 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4626 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4627 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4628 @end defmac
4629
4630 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4631 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4632 ordinarily expect.
4633
4634 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4635 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4636 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4637 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4638 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4639 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4640
4641 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4642 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4643 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4644 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4645 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4646 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4647 @end defmac
4648
4649 @defmac SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4650 Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4651 @var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4652 than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4653 handler.
4654
4655 When this macro is nonzero, the compiler will act as if
4656 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were nonzero when generating code for block
4657 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4658 Therefore, do not set this macro nonzero if unaligned accesses only add a
4659 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4660
4661 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4662 this macro is defined, it should produce a nonzero value when
4663 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is nonzero.
4664 @end defmac
4665
4666 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4667 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4668 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4669 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4670 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4671
4672 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4673 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4674 the number of such sequences.
4675
4676 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4677 optimized for speed rather than size.
4678
4679 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4680 @end defmac
4681
4682 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4683
4684 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_BY_PIECES_BRANCH_RATIO
4685
4686 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4687 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4688 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4689 @end defmac
4690
4691 @defmac STORE_MAX_PIECES
4692 A C expression used by @code{store_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4693 a store used to memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}, or two times
4694 the size of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, whichever is smaller.
4695 @end defmac
4696
4697 @defmac COMPARE_MAX_PIECES
4698 A C expression used by @code{compare_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4699 a load or store used to compare memory is. Defaults to
4700 @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}.
4701 @end defmac
4702
4703 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4704 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4705 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4706 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4707 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4708
4709 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4710 optimized for speed rather than size.
4711
4712 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4713 @end defmac
4714
4715 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4716 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4717 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4718 a block set insn or a library call.
4719 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4720 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4721
4722 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4723 optimized for speed rather than size.
4724
4725 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4726 @end defmac
4727
4728 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4729 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4730 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4731 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4732 @end defmac
4733
4734 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4735 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4736 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4737 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4738 @end defmac
4739
4740 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4741 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4742 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4743 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4744 @end defmac
4745
4746 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4747 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4748 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4749 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4750 @end defmac
4751
4752 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4753 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4754 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4755 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4756 @end defmac
4757
4758 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4759 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4760 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4761 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4762 @end defmac
4763
4764 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4765 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4766 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4767 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4768 @end defmac
4769
4770 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4771 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4772 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4773 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4774 @end defmac
4775
4776 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4777 Define this macro to be true if it is as good or better to call a constant
4778 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4779 @end defmac
4780
4781 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4782 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4783 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4784 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4785 @end defmac
4786
4787 @hook TARGET_OPTAB_SUPPORTED_P
4788
4789 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4790
4791 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4792
4793 @hook TARGET_MAX_NOCE_IFCVT_SEQ_COST
4794
4795 @hook TARGET_NO_SPECULATION_IN_DELAY_SLOTS_P
4796
4797 @node Scheduling
4798 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4799
4800 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4801 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4802 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4803 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4804
4805 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4806
4807 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4808
4809 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4810
4811 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4812
4813 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4814
4815 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4816
4817 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4818
4819 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4820
4821 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4822
4823 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4824
4825 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4826
4827 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4828
4829 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4830
4831 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4832
4833 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4834
4835 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4836
4837 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4838
4839 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4840
4841 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4842
4843 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4844
4845 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4846
4847 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4848
4849 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4850
4851 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4852
4853 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4854
4855 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4856
4857 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4858
4859 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4860
4861 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4862
4863 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4864
4865 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4866
4867 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4868
4869 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4870
4871 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4872
4873 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4874
4875 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4876
4877 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4878
4879 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4880
4881 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4882
4883 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4884
4885 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4886
4887 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4888
4889 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4890
4891 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4892
4893 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4894
4895 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_DIVMOD_LIBFUNC
4896
4897 @node Sections
4898 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4899 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4900 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4901
4902 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4903 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4904 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4905 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4906 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4907 of sections.
4908
4909 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4910 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4911 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4912 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4913 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4914 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4915 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4916
4917 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4918 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4919 to be string literals.
4920
4921 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4922 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4923 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4924 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4925
4926 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4927 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4928 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4929 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4930 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4931 reuse @code{text_section}.
4932
4933 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4934 if the target does not provide them.
4935
4936 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4937 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4938 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4939 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4940 @end defmac
4941
4942 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4943 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4944 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4945 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4946 @end defmac
4947
4948 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4949 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4950 executed functions in the program.
4951 @end defmac
4952
4953 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4954 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4955 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4956 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4957 @end defmac
4958
4959 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4960 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4961 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4962 initialized, writable small data.
4963 @end defmac
4964
4965 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4966 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4967 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4968 data.
4969 @end defmac
4970
4971 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4972 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4973 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4974 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4975 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4976 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4977 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4978 used.
4979 @end defmac
4980
4981 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4982 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4983 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4984 uninitialized, writable small data.
4985 @end defmac
4986
4987 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4988 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4989 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4990 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4991 @end defmac
4992
4993 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4994 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4995 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4996 default is @code{'T'}.
4997 @end defmac
4998
4999 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5000 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5001 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5002 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
5003 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
5004 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
5005 @end defmac
5006
5007 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
5008 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5009 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5010 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
5011 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
5012 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
5013 @end defmac
5014
5015 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
5016 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5017 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5018 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
5019 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
5020 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5021 @end defmac
5022
5023 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
5024 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5025 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5026 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
5027 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
5028 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5029 @end defmac
5030
5031 @defmac MACH_DEP_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
5032 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
5033 containing the flag used to mark a machine-dependent section. This
5034 corresponds to the @code{SECTION_MACH_DEP} section flag.
5035 @end defmac
5036
5037 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
5038 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
5039 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
5040 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
5041 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
5042 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
5043 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
5044 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
5045 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
5046 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
5047 @end defmac
5048
5049 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
5050 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
5051 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
5052 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
5053 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
5054 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
5055 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
5056 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
5057 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
5058 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
5059 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
5060 @end defmac
5061
5062 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
5063 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
5064 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
5065 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
5066 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
5067 @end defmac
5068
5069 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
5070 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
5071 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
5072 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
5073 readonly data section is used.
5074
5075 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
5076 @end defmac
5077
5078 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
5079
5080 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
5081
5082 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
5083
5084 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
5085 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
5086 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
5087
5088 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
5089 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
5090 it is unlikely to be called.
5091 @end defmac
5092
5093 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
5094
5095 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
5096
5097 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
5098
5099 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
5100
5101 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5102
5103 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5104
5105 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5106
5107 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5108
5109 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
5110
5111 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
5112
5113 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5114
5115 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5116
5117 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5118
5119
5120 @node PIC
5121 @section Position Independent Code
5122 @cindex position independent code
5123 @cindex PIC
5124
5125 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5126 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5127 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5128 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5129 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5130 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5131 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5132 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5133 relative addresses.
5134 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5135 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5136
5137 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5138 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5139 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5140 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5141 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5142 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5143 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5144 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5145 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5146 @end defmac
5147
5148 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5149 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5150 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5151 the default is zero. Do not define
5152 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5153 @end defmac
5154
5155 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5156 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5157 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5158 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5159 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5160 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5161 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5162 position independent code.
5163 @end defmac
5164
5165 @node Assembler Format
5166 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5167
5168 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5169 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5170 instructions do.
5171
5172 @menu
5173 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5174 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5175 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5176 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5177 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5178 and termination routines.
5179 * Macros for Initialization::
5180 Specific macros that control the handling of
5181 initialization and termination routines.
5182 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5183 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5184 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5185 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5186 @end menu
5187
5188 @node File Framework
5189 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5190 @cindex assembler format
5191 @cindex output of assembler code
5192
5193 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5194 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5195
5196 @findex default_file_start
5197 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5198
5199 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5200
5201 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5202
5203 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5204
5205 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5206 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5207 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5208 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5209 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5210 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5211 this function.
5212 @end deftypefun
5213
5214 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5215
5216 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5217
5218 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5219
5220 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5221 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5222 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5223 the end of the line.
5224 @end defmac
5225
5226 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5227 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5228 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5229 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5230 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5231 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5232 @end defmac
5233
5234 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5235 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5236 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5237 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5238 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5239 @end defmac
5240
5241 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5242 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5243 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5244 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5245
5246 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5247 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5248 @end defmac
5249
5250 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5251
5252 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5253
5254 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5255 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5256 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5257 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5258 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5259 of the filename using this macro.
5260 @end defmac
5261
5262 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5263
5264 @hook TARGET_ASM_ELF_FLAGS_NUMERIC
5265
5266 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5267
5268 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5269
5270 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5271 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5272 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5273 @end deftypevr
5274
5275 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5276 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5277
5278 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5279
5280 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5281
5282 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5283
5284 @need 2000
5285 @node Data Output
5286 @subsection Output of Data
5287
5288
5289 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5290
5291 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5292
5293 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5294
5295 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5296
5297 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5298 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5299 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5300 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5301 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5302
5303 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5304 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5305 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5306 @end defmac
5307
5308 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5309 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5310 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5311 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5312 @end defmac
5313
5314 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5315 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5316 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5317 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5318 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5319 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5320 pool before the function.
5321 @end defmac
5322
5323 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5324 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5325 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5326 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5327 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5328 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5329 immediately after this call.
5330
5331 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5332 not be defined.
5333 @end defmac
5334
5335 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5336 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5337 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5338 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5339
5340 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5341 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5342 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5343 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5344 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5345 alignment.
5346
5347 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5348 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5349 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5350 Here is how to do this:
5351
5352 @smallexample
5353 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5354 @end smallexample
5355
5356 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5357 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5358 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5359
5360 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5361 @end defmac
5362
5363 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5364 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5365 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5366 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5367 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5368 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5369
5370 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5371 define this macro.
5372 @end defmac
5373
5374 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5375 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5376 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5377 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5378 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5379
5380 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5381 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5382 @end defmac
5383
5384 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5385
5386 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5387 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5388
5389 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5390 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5391 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5392 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5393 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5394 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5395 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5396 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5397 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5398 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5399 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5400 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5401 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5402 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5403 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5404 on the host machine.
5405
5406 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5407 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5408 machine's memory.
5409 @end defmac
5410
5411 @node Uninitialized Data
5412 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5413
5414 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5415 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5416
5417 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5418 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5419 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5420 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5421 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5422 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5423 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5424 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5425 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5426 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5427 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5428 an ordinary undefined external.
5429
5430 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5431 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5432 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5433
5434 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5435 common global variables are output.
5436 @end defmac
5437
5438 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5439 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5440 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5441 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5442 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5443 as the number of bits.
5444 @end defmac
5445
5446 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5447 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5448 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5449 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5450 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5451 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5452 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5453 @end defmac
5454
5455 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5456 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5457 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5458 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5459 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5460
5461 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5462 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5463 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5464 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5465 the name, and a newline.
5466
5467 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5468 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5469 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5470 You do not need to do both.
5471
5472 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5473 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5474 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5475 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5476 common in order to save space in the object file.
5477 @end defmac
5478
5479 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5480 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5481 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5482 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5483 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5484
5485 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5486 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5487 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5488
5489 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5490 static variables are output.
5491 @end defmac
5492
5493 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5494 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5495 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5496 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5497 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5498 as the number of bits.
5499 @end defmac
5500
5501 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5502 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5503 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5504 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5505 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5506 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5507 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5508 @end defmac
5509
5510 @node Label Output
5511 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5512
5513 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5514 This is about outputting labels.
5515
5516 @findex assemble_name
5517 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5518 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5519 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5520 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5521 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5522 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5523 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5524 @end defmac
5525
5526 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5527 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5528 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5529 a function.
5530 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5531 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5532 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5533 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5534
5535 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5536 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5537 @end defmac
5538
5539 @findex assemble_name_raw
5540 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5541 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5542 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5543 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5544 that it is more efficient.
5545 @end defmac
5546
5547 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5548 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5549 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5550 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5551 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5552
5553 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5554 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5555 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5556 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5557 define this macro.
5558 @end defmac
5559
5560 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5561 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5562 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5563 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5564 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5565 provided.
5566 @end defmac
5567
5568 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5569 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5570 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5571 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5572 address.
5573
5574 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5575 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5576 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5577 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5578 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5579 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5580 @end defmac
5581
5582 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5583 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5584 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5585 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5586 @samp{.} is used instead.
5587 @end defmac
5588
5589 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5590 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5591 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5592 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5593 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5594 @end defmac
5595
5596 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5597 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5598 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5599 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5600 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5601
5602 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5603 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5604 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5605 types at all, do not define this macro.
5606 @end defmac
5607
5608 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5609 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5610 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5611 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5612 the default is not to define this macro.
5613
5614 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5615 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5616 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5617 types at all, do not define this macro.
5618 @end defmac
5619
5620 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5621 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5622 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5623 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5624 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5625 you should not count on this.
5626
5627 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5628 definition of this macro is provided.
5629 @end defmac
5630
5631 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5632 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5633 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5634 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5635 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5636 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5637 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5638
5639 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5640 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5641
5642 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5643 of this macro.
5644 @end defmac
5645
5646 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5647 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5648 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5649 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5650 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5651 representing the function.
5652
5653 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5654
5655 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5656 of this macro.
5657 @end defmac
5658
5659 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5660 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5661 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5662 cold function partition which is being defined. This macro is responsible
5663 for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5664 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5665 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5666
5667 If this macro is not defined, then the cold partition name is defined in the
5668 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5669
5670 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5671 of this macro.
5672 @end defmac
5673
5674 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5675 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5676 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a cold function
5677 partition which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5678 cold partition of the function. The argument @var{decl} is the
5679 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5680
5681 If this macro is not defined, then the partition size is not defined.
5682
5683 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5684 of this macro.
5685 @end defmac
5686
5687 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5688 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5689 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5690 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5691 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5692 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5693
5694 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5695 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5696
5697 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5698 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5699 @end defmac
5700
5701 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5702
5703 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5704 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5705 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5706 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5707
5708 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5709 nothing.
5710 @end defmac
5711
5712 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5713 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5714 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5715 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5716 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5717 something about the size of the object.
5718
5719 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5720 nothing.
5721
5722 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5723 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5724 @end defmac
5725
5726 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5727
5728 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5729
5730 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5731
5732 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5733 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5734 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5735 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5736 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5737 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5738 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5739 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5740
5741 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5742 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5743 macro.
5744 @end defmac
5745
5746 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5747 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5748 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5749 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5750 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5751 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5752 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5753 to make @var{name} weak.
5754 @end defmac
5755
5756 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5757 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5758 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5759 declaration of @code{name}.
5760 @end defmac
5761
5762 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5763 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5764 supports weak symbols.
5765
5766 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5767 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5768 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5769 @end defmac
5770
5771 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5772 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5773
5774 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5775 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5776 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5777 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5778 @end defmac
5779
5780 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5781 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5782 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5783 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5784 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5785 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5786 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5787 @end defmac
5788
5789 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5790 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5791 semantics.
5792
5793 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5794 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5795 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5796 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5797 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5798 be emitted as one-only.
5799 @end defmac
5800
5801 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5802
5803 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5804 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5805 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5806 The default is @code{0}.
5807
5808 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5809 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5810 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5811 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5812 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5813 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5814 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5815
5816 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5817 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5818 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5819 table of contents.
5820 @end defmac
5821
5822 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5823 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5824 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5825 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5826 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5827 declaration.
5828
5829 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5830 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5831 @end defmac
5832
5833 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5834
5835 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5836
5837 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5838 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5839 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5840 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5841 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5842 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5843 @end defmac
5844
5845 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5846
5847 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5848 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5849 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5850 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5851 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5852 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5853 @end defmac
5854
5855 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5856 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5857 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5858 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5859 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5860 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5861 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5862 being taken.
5863 @end defmac
5864
5865 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5866
5867 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5868 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5869 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5870 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5871 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5872 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5873 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5874 bundles.
5875
5876 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5877 used.
5878 @end defmac
5879
5880 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5881 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5882 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5883
5884 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5885 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5886 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5887
5888 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5889 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5890 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5891 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5892 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5893 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5894 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5895 @end defmac
5896
5897 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5898 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5899 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5900 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5901 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5902
5903 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5904 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5905 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5906 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5907 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5908 internal static variables in different scopes.
5909
5910 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5911 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5912 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5913 between the name and the number will suffice.
5914
5915 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5916 which is correct for most systems.
5917 @end defmac
5918
5919 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5920 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5921 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5922
5923 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5924 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5925 correct for most systems.
5926 @end defmac
5927
5928 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5929 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5930 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5931 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5932 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5933 the tree nodes are available.
5934
5935 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5936 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5937 correct for most systems.
5938 @end defmac
5939
5940 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5941 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5942 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5943 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5944 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5945 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5946 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5947 @end defmac
5948
5949 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5950 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5951 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5952 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5953 an undefined weak symbol.
5954
5955 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5956 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5957 @end defmac
5958
5959 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5960 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5961 Objective-C methods.
5962
5963 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5964 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5965 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5966 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5967
5968 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5969 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5970 systems define other ways of computing names.
5971
5972 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5973 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5974 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5975 50 characters extra.
5976
5977 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5978 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5979 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5980 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5981
5982 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5983 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5984 @end defmac
5985
5986 @node Initialization
5987 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5988 @cindex initialization routines
5989 @cindex termination routines
5990 @cindex constructors, output of
5991 @cindex destructors, output of
5992
5993 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5994 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5995 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5996 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5997 @code{main} is called.
5998
5999 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
6000 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
6001 terminates.
6002
6003 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
6004 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
6005 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
6006 system, you need to specify how to do this.
6007
6008 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
6009 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
6010 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
6011
6012 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
6013 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
6014 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
6015 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
6016 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
6017
6018 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
6019 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
6020 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
6021 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
6022 pointer containing zero.
6023
6024 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
6025 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
6026 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
6027 list; destructors in forward order.
6028
6029 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
6030 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
6031 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
6032 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
6033 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
6034 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
6035 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
6036 Termination functions are handled similarly.
6037
6038 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
6039 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
6040 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
6041 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
6042 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
6043
6044 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
6045 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
6046 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
6047 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
6048 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
6049
6050 @smallexample
6051 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
6052 @end smallexample
6053
6054 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
6055 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
6056 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
6057 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
6058 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
6059
6060 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
6061 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
6062 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
6063 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
6064 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
6065 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
6066
6067 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
6068 macro properly.
6069
6070 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
6071 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
6072 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
6073 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
6074 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
6075 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
6076
6077 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
6078 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
6079 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
6080 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
6081 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
6082 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
6083 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
6084 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
6085 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
6086 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
6087 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
6088 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
6089 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
6090 the initialization process.
6091
6092 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
6093 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
6094 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
6095 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
6096 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
6097 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
6098 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
6099 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
6100 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
6101 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
6102 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
6103
6104 @ifinfo
6105 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6106 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6107 @end ifinfo
6108
6109 @node Macros for Initialization
6110 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6111
6112 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6113 and termination functions:
6114
6115 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6116 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
6117 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
6118 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
6119 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
6120 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
6121 run the initialization functions.
6122 @end defmac
6123
6124 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
6125 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6126 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6127 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6128 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6129 @end defmac
6130
6131 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6132 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6133 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6134 @end defmac
6135
6136 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6137 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6138 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6139 @end defmac
6140
6141 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6142 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6143 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6144 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6145 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6146 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6147
6148 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6149 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6150 exception tables embedded in the code.
6151 @end defmac
6152
6153 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6154 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6155 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6156 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6157 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6158 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6159 @end defmac
6160
6161 @defmac INVOKE__main
6162 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6163 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6164 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6165 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6166 @end defmac
6167
6168 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6169 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6170 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6171 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6172 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6173 @end defmac
6174
6175 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6176
6177 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6178
6179 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6180
6181 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6182 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6183
6184 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6185 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6186 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6187
6188 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6189 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6190
6191 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6192 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6193 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6194 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6195
6196 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6197 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6198 @end defmac
6199
6200 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6201 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6202 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6203 @command{nm}.
6204 @end defmac
6205
6206 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6207 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6208 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6209 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6210 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6211 produces.
6212 @end defmac
6213
6214 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6215 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6216 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6217 termination functions in shared libraries:
6218
6219 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6220 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6221 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6222 @end defmac
6223
6224 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6225 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6226 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6227 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6228 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6229 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6230 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6231 @end defmac
6232
6233 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6234 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6235 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6236 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6237 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6238 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6239 @end defmac
6240
6241 @node Instruction Output
6242 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6243
6244 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6245 This describes assembler instruction output.
6246
6247 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6248 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6249 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6250 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6251 @end defmac
6252
6253 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6254 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6255 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6256 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6257 to registers using alternate names.
6258 @end defmac
6259
6260 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6261 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6262 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6263 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6264 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6265 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6266 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6267 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6268
6269 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6270 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6271 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6272 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6273 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6274 @end defmac
6275
6276 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6277 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6278 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6279
6280 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6281 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6282 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6283 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6284 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6285 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6286 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6287 so that it will not be output twice.
6288
6289 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6290 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6291 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6292 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6293 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6294
6295 @findex recog_data.operand
6296 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6297 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6298
6299 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6300 in the usual way.
6301 @end defmac
6302
6303 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6304 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6305 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6306 they will be output differently.
6307
6308 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6309 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6310 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6311 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6312 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6313 by changing the contents of the vector.
6314
6315 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6316 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6317 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6318 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6319 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6320 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6321
6322 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6323 @end defmac
6324
6325 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6326
6327 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6328 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6329 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6330 RTL expression.
6331
6332 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6333 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6334 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6335 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6336 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6337 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6338 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6339
6340 @findex reg_names
6341 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6342 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6343 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6344 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6345
6346 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6347 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6348 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6349 @var{code}.
6350 @end defmac
6351
6352 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6353 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6354 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6355 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6356 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6357 in this way.
6358 @end defmac
6359
6360 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6361 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6362 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6363 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6364
6365 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6366 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6367 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6368 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6369 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6370 Format}.
6371 @end defmac
6372
6373 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6374 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6375 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6376 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6377 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6378 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6379 or whatever.
6380
6381 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6382 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6383 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6384 @end defmac
6385
6386 @findex final_sequence
6387 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6388 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6389 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6390 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6391 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6392 being output.
6393
6394 @findex asm_fprintf
6395 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6396 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6397 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6398 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6399 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6400 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6401 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6402 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6403 files can define these macros differently.
6404 @end defmac
6405
6406 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6407 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6408 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6409 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6410 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6411 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6412 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6413 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6414 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6415 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6416 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6417 @end defmac
6418
6419 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6420 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6421 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6422 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6423 first variant.
6424
6425 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6426 @smallexample
6427 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6428 @end smallexample
6429 @noindent
6430 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6431 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6432 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6433 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6434 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6435 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6436 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6437 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6438 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6439
6440 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6441 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6442 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6443
6444 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6445 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6446 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6447 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6448 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6449 opcodes or operand order.
6450 @end defmac
6451
6452 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6453 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6454 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6455 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6456 profiling.
6457 @end defmac
6458
6459 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6460 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6461 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6462 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6463 profiling.
6464 @end defmac
6465
6466 @node Dispatch Tables
6467 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6468
6469 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6470 This concerns dispatch tables.
6471
6472 @cindex dispatch table
6473 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6474 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6475 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6476 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6477 definitions of these labels are output using
6478 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6479 way here. For example,
6480
6481 @smallexample
6482 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6483 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6484 @end smallexample
6485
6486 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6487 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6488 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6489 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6490 mode and flags can be read.
6491 @end defmac
6492
6493 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6494 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6495 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6496
6497 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6498 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6499 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6500 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6501 For example,
6502
6503 @smallexample
6504 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6505 @end smallexample
6506 @end defmac
6507
6508 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6509 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6510 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6511 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6512 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6513 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6514
6515 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6516 for the table.
6517
6518 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6519 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6520 @end defmac
6521
6522 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6523 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6524 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6525 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6526 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6527 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6528 of the preceding label.
6529
6530 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6531 the jump-table.
6532 @end defmac
6533
6534 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6535
6536 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6537
6538 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6539
6540 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6541
6542 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6543
6544 @node Exception Region Output
6545 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6546
6547 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6548
6549 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6550 region.
6551
6552 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6553 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6554 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6555 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6556 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6557
6558 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6559 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6560 @end defmac
6561
6562 @defmac EH_FRAME_THROUGH_COLLECT2
6563 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will identified by
6564 specially named labels. The collect2 process will locate these
6565 labels and generate code to register the frames.
6566
6567 This might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker will not
6568 place the eh_frames in-between the sentinals from @file{crtstuff.c},
6569 or if the system linker does garbage collection and sections cannot
6570 be marked as not to be collected.
6571 @end defmac
6572
6573 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6574 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6575 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6576 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6577 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6578 @end defmac
6579
6580 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6581 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6582 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6583 @end defmac
6584
6585 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6586 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6587 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6588 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6589 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6590 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6591 @end defmac
6592
6593 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6594 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6595 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6596 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6597 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6598 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6599 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6600
6601 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6602 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6603 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6604
6605 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6606 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6607 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6608 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6609 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6610 depending on this setting.
6611
6612 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6613 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6614 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6615 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6616 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6617 @end deftypefn
6618
6619 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6620 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6621 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6622 command-line option processing.
6623 @end deftypevr
6624
6625 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6626 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6627 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6628 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6629 @end defmac
6630
6631 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6632 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6633 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6634 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6635 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6636 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6637 @end defmac
6638
6639 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6640 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6641 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6642 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6643 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is true, and the positive
6644 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{SDB and DWARF}. Only applicable if
6645 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6646 @end defmac
6647
6648 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6649
6650 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6651
6652 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6653
6654 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6655
6656 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6657
6658 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6659
6660 @node Alignment Output
6661 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6662
6663 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6664 This describes commands for alignment.
6665
6666 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6667 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6668 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6669
6670 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6671 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6672 define the macro.
6673
6674 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6675 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6676 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6677 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6678 @end defmac
6679
6680 @hook TARGET_ASM_JUMP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6681
6682 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6683 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6684 a @code{BARRIER}.
6685
6686 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6687 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6688 define the macro.
6689 @end defmac
6690
6691 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6692
6693 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6694 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6695 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6696
6697 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6698 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6699 define the macro.
6700
6701 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6702 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6703 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6704 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6705 @end defmac
6706
6707 @hook TARGET_ASM_LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6708
6709 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6710 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6711 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6712 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6713
6714 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6715 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6716 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6717 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6718 @end defmac
6719
6720 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6721
6722 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6723 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6724 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6725 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6726 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6727 @end defmac
6728
6729 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6730 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6731 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6732 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6733 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6734 section.
6735 @end defmac
6736
6737 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6738 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6739 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6740 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6741 @end defmac
6742
6743 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6744 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6745 for padding, if necessary.
6746 @end defmac
6747
6748 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6749 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6750 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6751 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6752 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6753 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6754 @end defmac
6755
6756 @need 3000
6757 @node Debugging Info
6758 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6759
6760 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6761 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6762
6763 @menu
6764 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6765 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6766 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6767 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6768 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6769 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6770 @end menu
6771
6772 @node All Debuggers
6773 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6774
6775 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6776 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6777
6778 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6779 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6780 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6781 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6782 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6783 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6784 compiler and another for DBX@.
6785
6786 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6787 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6788 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6789 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6790 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6791
6792 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6793 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6794 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6795 @end defmac
6796
6797 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6798 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6799 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6800 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6801 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6802 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6803 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6804 @option{-g} options is used.
6805 @end defmac
6806
6807 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6808 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6809 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6810 @var{offset}.
6811 @end defmac
6812
6813 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6814 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6815 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6816 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6817 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6818 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG},
6819 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG}, and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6820
6821 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6822 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6823 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6824 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6825 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6826
6827 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6828 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6829 @option{-gcoff}, @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6830 @end defmac
6831
6832 @node DBX Options
6833 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6834
6835 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6836 These are specific options for DBX output.
6837
6838 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6839 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6840 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6841 @end defmac
6842
6843 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6844 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6845 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6846 @end defmac
6847
6848 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6849 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6850 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6851 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6852 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6853 if there is any occasion to.
6854 @end defmac
6855
6856 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6857 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6858 in the text section.
6859 @end defmac
6860
6861 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6862 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6863 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6864 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6865 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6866 @end defmac
6867
6868 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6869 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6870 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6871 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6872 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6873 information format.
6874 @end defmac
6875
6876 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6877 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6878 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6879 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6880 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6881 @end defmac
6882
6883 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6884 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6885 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6886 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6887 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6888 @end defmac
6889
6890 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6891 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6892 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6893 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6894 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6895 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6896 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6897 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6898 @end defmac
6899
6900 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6901 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6902 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6903 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6904 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6905 if backslash is correct for your system.
6906 @end defmac
6907
6908 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6909 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6910 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6911 variable.
6912 @end defmac
6913
6914 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6915 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6916 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6917 @end defmac
6918
6919 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6920 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6921 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6922 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6923 @end defmac
6924
6925 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6926 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6927 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6928 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6929 @end defmac
6930
6931 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6932 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6933 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6934 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6935 @end defmac
6936
6937 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6938 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6939 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6940 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6941 code.
6942 @end defmac
6943
6944 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6945 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6946 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6947 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6948 an absolute address.
6949 @end defmac
6950
6951 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6952 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6953 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6954 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6955 @end defmac
6956
6957 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6958 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6959 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6960 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6961 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6962 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6963 number for a type number.
6964 @end defmac
6965
6966 @node DBX Hooks
6967 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6968
6969 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6970 These are hooks for DBX format.
6971
6972 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6973 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6974 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6975 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6976 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6977 unique labels in the assembly output.
6978
6979 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6980 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6981 @end defmac
6982
6983 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6984 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6985 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6986 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6987 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6988 @end defmac
6989
6990 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6991 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6992 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6993 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6994 @end defmac
6995
6996 @node File Names and DBX
6997 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6998
6999 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7000 This describes file names in DBX format.
7001
7002 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7003 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
7004 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
7005 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
7006 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
7007
7008 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
7009 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
7010
7011 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
7012 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
7013 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
7014 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
7015 @end defmac
7016
7017 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
7018 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
7019 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
7020 the beginning of the file.
7021 @end defmac
7022
7023 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
7024 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
7025 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
7026 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
7027 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
7028 @end defmac
7029
7030 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7031 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
7032 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
7033 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
7034
7035 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
7036 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
7037 @end defmac
7038
7039 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
7040 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
7041 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
7042 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
7043 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
7044 @end defmac
7045
7046 @need 2000
7047 @node SDB and DWARF
7048 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
7049
7050 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7051 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
7052
7053 @defmac SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
7054 Define this macro to 1 if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
7055 for SDB in response to the @option{-g} option.
7056 @end defmac
7057
7058 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
7059 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
7060 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
7061
7062 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
7063
7064 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
7065 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
7066 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
7067 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
7068 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
7069 @end defmac
7070
7071 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
7072 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
7073 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
7074 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
7075 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
7076 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
7077 @end defmac
7078
7079 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
7080
7081 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7082 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
7083 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
7084 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
7085 @end defmac
7086
7087 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
7088
7089 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
7090
7091 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
7092
7093 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
7094
7095 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7096 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7097 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7098 @end defmac
7099
7100 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7101 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7102 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
7103 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
7104 @end defmac
7105
7106 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{offset}, @var{section})
7107 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
7108 section-relative reference to the given @var{label} plus @var{offset}, using
7109 an integer of the given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the
7110 given @var{section}.
7111 @end defmac
7112
7113 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7114 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
7115 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7116 @end defmac
7117
7118 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DATAREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7119 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to the
7120 given @var{label} relative to the dbase, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7121 @end defmac
7122
7123 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
7124 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
7125 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
7126 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
7127 is referenced by a function.
7128 @end defmac
7129
7130 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
7131
7132 @defmac PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7133 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
7134 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
7135 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
7136 not define them yourself.
7137 @end defmac
7138
7139 @defmac SDB_DELIM
7140 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
7141 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
7142 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
7143 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
7144 required.
7145 @end defmac
7146
7147 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7148 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
7149 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
7150 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
7151 it.
7152 @end defmac
7153
7154 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7155 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7156 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7157 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7158 @end defmac
7159
7160 @defmac SDB_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
7161 A C statement to output SDB debugging information before code for line
7162 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
7163 @var{stream}. The default is to emit an @code{.ln} directive.
7164 @end defmac
7165
7166 @need 2000
7167 @node VMS Debug
7168 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
7169
7170 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7171 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
7172
7173 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
7174 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
7175 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
7176 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
7177 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
7178 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
7179 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
7180 @end defmac
7181
7182 @node Floating Point
7183 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7184 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7185 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7186
7187 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
7188 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7189 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7190 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7191 doing the compilation.
7192
7193 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7194 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
7195 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
7196 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
7197 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
7198 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
7199 target floating point formats are identical.
7200
7201 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
7202 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
7203 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
7204 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
7205
7206 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7207 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
7208 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
7209 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
7210 quantity.
7211 @end defmac
7212
7213 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7214 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
7215 @end deftypefn
7216
7217 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7218 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
7219 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
7220 @end deftypefn
7221
7222 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7223 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7224 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7225 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7226 defined by the C language for both.
7227 @end deftypefn
7228
7229 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7230 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7231 @end deftypefn
7232
7233 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7234 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7235 @end deftypefn
7236
7237 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7238 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7239 @end deftypefn
7240
7241 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7242 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7243 @end deftypefn
7244
7245 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7246 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7247 @end deftypefn
7248
7249 @node Mode Switching
7250 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7251 @cindex mode switching
7252 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7253
7254 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7255 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7256 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7257
7258 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7259 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7260 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7261 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7262 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7263 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you can't put this into instruction emitting
7264 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7265
7266 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7267 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7268 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7269 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7270 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7271 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7272 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7273 are optional.
7274 @end defmac
7275
7276 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7277 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7278 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7279 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7280 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7281 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7282 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7283 entity in question.
7284 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7285 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7286 switch is needed / supplied.
7287 @end defmac
7288
7289 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7290
7291 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7292
7293 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7294
7295 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7296
7297 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7298
7299 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7300
7301 @node Target Attributes
7302 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7303 @cindex target attributes
7304 @cindex machine attributes
7305 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7306
7307 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7308 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7309 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7310
7311 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7312
7313 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7314
7315 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7316
7317 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7318
7319 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7320
7321 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7322
7323 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7324
7325 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7326 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7327 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7328 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7329 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7330 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7331 on this implementation detail.
7332 @end defmac
7333
7334 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7335
7336 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7337
7338 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7339
7340 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7341
7342 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7343
7344 @hook TARGET_OPTION_POST_STREAM_IN
7345
7346 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7347
7348 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7349
7350 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7351
7352 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7353
7354 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7355
7356 @hook TARGET_RELAYOUT_FUNCTION
7357
7358 @node Emulated TLS
7359 @section Emulating TLS
7360 @cindex Emulated TLS
7361
7362 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7363 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7364 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7365 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7366 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7367 layer.
7368
7369 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7370 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7371 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7372 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7373
7374 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7375
7376 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7377
7378 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7379
7380 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7381
7382 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7383
7384 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7385
7386 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7387
7388 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7389
7390 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7391
7392 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7393
7394 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7395 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7396 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7397
7398 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7399 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7400 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7401 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7402
7403 @smallexample
7404 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7405 unsigned int d;
7406
7407 d = cp0count + 3;
7408 @end smallexample
7409
7410 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7411 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7412 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7413
7414 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7415 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7416 later in the function.
7417
7418 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7419 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7420 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7421
7422 @node PCH Target
7423 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7424 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7425
7426 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7427
7428 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7429
7430 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7431
7432 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7433
7434 @node C++ ABI
7435 @section C++ ABI parameters
7436 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7437
7438 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7439
7440 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7441
7442 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7443
7444 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7445
7446 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7447
7448 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7449
7450 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7451
7452 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7453
7454 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7455
7456 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7457
7458 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7459
7460 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7461
7462 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7463
7464 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7465
7466 @node Named Address Spaces
7467 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7468 @cindex named address spaces
7469
7470 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7471 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7472 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7473 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7474 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7475 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7476 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7477 @code{const} type attributes.
7478
7479 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7480 pointers to the generic address space.
7481
7482 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7483 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7484 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7485 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7486 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7487 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7488 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7489 always 32 bits).
7490
7491 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7492 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7493 address space.
7494
7495 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7496 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7497 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7498 named address space #1:
7499 @smallexample
7500 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7501 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7502 @end smallexample
7503
7504 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7505
7506 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7507
7508 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7509
7510 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7511
7512 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7513
7514 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7515
7516 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ZERO_ADDRESS_VALID
7517
7518 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7519
7520 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DEBUG
7521
7522 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DIAGNOSE_USAGE
7523
7524 @node Misc
7525 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7526 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7527
7528 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7529 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7530
7531 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7532 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7533 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7534 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7535 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7536 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7537 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7538 @end defmac
7539
7540 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7541 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7542 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7543 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7544 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7545 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7546 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7547 @end defmac
7548
7549 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7550 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7551 elements of a jump-table should have.
7552 @end defmac
7553
7554 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7555 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7556 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7557 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7558 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7559 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7560 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7561 flags can be updated.
7562 @end defmac
7563
7564 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7565 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7566 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7567 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7568 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7569 is in effect.
7570 @end defmac
7571
7572 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7573
7574 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7575 Define this macro to 1 if operations between registers with integral mode
7576 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7577 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7578 @end defmac
7579
7580 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7581 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7582 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7583 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7584 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7585 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7586 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7587 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7588
7589 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7590 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7591 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7592 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7593 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7594
7595 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7596 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7597 of these hard registers @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns nonzero
7598 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7599 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7600
7601 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7602 mode, @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7603 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7604 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7605 @end defmac
7606
7607 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7608 Define this macro to 1 if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7609 extends.
7610 @end defmac
7611
7612 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7613
7614 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7615 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7616 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7617 @end defmac
7618
7619 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7620 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7621 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7622 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7623 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7624 at run-time.
7625 @end defmac
7626
7627 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7628 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7629 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7630 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7631 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7632 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7633 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7634 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7635 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7636 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7637 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7638
7639 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7640 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7641 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7642
7643 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7644 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7645 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7646 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7647 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7648
7649 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7650 @end defmac
7651
7652 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7653 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7654
7655 @defmac TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7656 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7657 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7658 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7659 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7660
7661 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7662
7663 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7664 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7665 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7666 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7667 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7668 such cases may improve things.
7669 @end defmac
7670
7671 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7672
7673 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7674 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7675 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7676 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7677 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7678 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7679
7680 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7681 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7682 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7683 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7684 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7685 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7686 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7687 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7688 the compiler.
7689
7690 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7691 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7692 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7693 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7694 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7695 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7696 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7697 expression
7698
7699 @smallexample
7700 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7701 @end smallexample
7702
7703 @noindent
7704 can be converted to
7705
7706 @smallexample
7707 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7708 @end smallexample
7709
7710 @noindent
7711 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7712 tested into the sign bit.
7713
7714 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7715 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7716 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7717 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7718 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7719 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7720
7721 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7722 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7723 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7724 to be used:
7725
7726 @itemize @bullet
7727 @item
7728 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7729 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7730 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7731 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7732 combine the normalization with other operations.
7733
7734 @item
7735 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7736 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7737 other machines.
7738
7739 @item
7740 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7741 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7742 others.
7743
7744 @item
7745 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7746 @end itemize
7747
7748 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7749 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7750 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7751 those cases, e.g., one matching
7752
7753 @smallexample
7754 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7755 @end smallexample
7756
7757 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7758 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7759 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7760 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7761 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7762 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7763 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7764 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7765
7766 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7767 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7768 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7769 @end defmac
7770
7771 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7772 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7773 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7774 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7775 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7776 this macro.
7777 @end defmac
7778
7779 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7780 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7781 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7782 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7783 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7784 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7785 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7786 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7787 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7788 given mode.
7789 @end defmac
7790
7791 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7792 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7793 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7794 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7795 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7796 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7797 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7798 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7799 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7800 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7801 this value.
7802
7803 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7804 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7805
7806 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7807 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7808 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7809 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7810
7811 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7812 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7813 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7814 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7815 breaking the API@.
7816 @end defmac
7817
7818 @defmac Pmode
7819 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7820 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7821 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7822 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7823 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7824
7825 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7826 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7827 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7828 to @code{Pmode}.
7829 @end defmac
7830
7831 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7832 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7833 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7834 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7835 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7836 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7837 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7838 @end defmac
7839
7840 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7841 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7842 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7843 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7844 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7845 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7846
7847 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7848 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7849 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7850 @end defmac
7851
7852 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7853
7854 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7855
7856 @defmac NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7857 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C@.
7858 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7859 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7860 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7861 @end defmac
7862
7863 @findex #pragma
7864 @findex pragma
7865 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7866 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7867 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7868 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7869 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7870 setup required for the pragmas.
7871
7872 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7873 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7874 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7875
7876 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7877 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7878
7879 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7880 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7881 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7882 @end defmac
7883
7884 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7885 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7886
7887 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7888 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7889 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7890 pragma of the form
7891
7892 @smallexample
7893 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7894 @end smallexample
7895
7896 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7897 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7898 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7899 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7900 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7901 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7902 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7903 arguments of pragmas registered with
7904 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7905 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7906
7907 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7908 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7909 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7910 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7911 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7912 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7913 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7914 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7915 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7916 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7917 how to build this object file.
7918 @end deftypefun
7919
7920 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7921 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7922 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7923 @end defmac
7924
7925 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7926 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7927 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7928 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7929 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7930 @end defmac
7931
7932 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7933 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7934 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7935 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7936 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7937 @end defmac
7938
7939 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7940 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7941 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7942 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7943 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7944 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7945 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7946 you should define this macro.
7947
7948 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7949 @end defmac
7950
7951 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7952 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7953 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7954 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7955 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7956 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7957 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7958 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7959 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7960 slot of @var{insn}.
7961
7962 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7963 @end defmac
7964
7965 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7966 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7967 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7968 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7969 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7970 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7971
7972 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7973 @end defmac
7974
7975 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_ADJUST
7976
7977 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7978 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7979 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7980 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7981 separate math library.
7982
7983 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7984 @end defmac
7985
7986 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7987 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7988 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7989
7990 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7991 is wrong.
7992 @end defmac
7993
7994 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7995 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7996 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7997 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7998 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7999 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
8000 for cross-profiling.
8001 @end defmac
8002
8003 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
8004
8005 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
8006 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
8007 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
8008 1 if it does use cc0.
8009 @end defmac
8010
8011 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
8012 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
8013 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
8014 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
8015 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
8016 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
8017 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
8018 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
8019 @end defmac
8020
8021 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
8022 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
8023 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
8024 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
8025 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
8026 @end defmac
8027
8028 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
8029 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
8030 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
8031 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
8032 about the currently processed blocks.
8033 @end defmac
8034
8035 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
8036 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
8037 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
8038 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
8039 to by @var{ce_info}.
8040 @end defmac
8041
8042 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
8043 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
8044 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
8045 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
8046 to by @var{ce_info}.
8047 @end defmac
8048
8049 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
8050 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
8051 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
8052 to by @var{ce_info}.
8053 @end defmac
8054
8055 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
8056
8057 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
8058
8059 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
8060
8061 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
8062
8063 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_CHKP_FUNCTION
8064 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_TYPE
8065 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_MODE
8066 @hook TARGET_CHKP_MAKE_BOUNDS_CONSTANT
8067 @hook TARGET_CHKP_INITIALIZE_BOUNDS
8068
8069 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
8070
8071 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
8072
8073 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
8074
8075 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
8076
8077 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
8078
8079 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
8080
8081 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
8082
8083 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
8084
8085 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
8086
8087 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
8088
8089 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
8090
8091 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
8092
8093 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
8094
8095 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
8096
8097 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
8098 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
8099 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
8100 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
8101 @end defmac
8102
8103 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
8104 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
8105 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
8106 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
8107 executable files.
8108 @end defmac
8109
8110 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
8111 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
8112 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
8113 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
8114 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
8115 lists.
8116 @end defmac
8117
8118 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
8119 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
8120 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
8121 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
8122 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
8123 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
8124 defined as this expression:
8125
8126 @smallexample
8127 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
8128 build_tree_list
8129 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
8130 NULL))
8131 @end smallexample
8132 @end defmac
8133
8134 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
8135
8136 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
8137
8138 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
8139
8140 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
8141
8142 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
8143
8144 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
8145
8146 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
8147
8148 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
8149 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
8150 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
8151 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
8152 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
8153 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
8154 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
8155 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
8156 @end defmac
8157
8158 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8159 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8160 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
8161 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
8162 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8163 @end deftypefn
8164
8165 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8166 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8167 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
8168 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
8169 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
8170 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8171 @end deftypefn
8172
8173 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
8174 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
8175 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
8176 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
8177 that are different from @option{-I}.
8178 @end deftypefn
8179
8180 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
8181 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
8182 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
8183 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
8184 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
8185 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
8186 @end defmac
8187
8188 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
8189 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8190 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
8191 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
8192 @end defmac
8193
8194 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
8195 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
8196 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
8197 @end defmac
8198
8199 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
8200 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8201 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
8202 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
8203 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
8204 @end defmac
8205
8206 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
8207 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
8208 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
8209 @end defmac
8210
8211 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
8212 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
8213 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
8214 and scanf formatter settings.
8215 @end defmac
8216
8217 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
8218
8219 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
8220
8221 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
8222
8223 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
8224
8225 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
8226
8227 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
8228
8229 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
8230 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
8231 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
8232 @end defmac
8233
8234 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8235 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8236 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8237 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8238 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8239 @end defmac
8240
8241 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8242
8243 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8244
8245 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8246
8247 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8248
8249 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8250
8251 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8252
8253 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8254
8255 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8256
8257 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8258
8259 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8260
8261 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8262
8263 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8264
8265 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8266
8267 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8268 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8269 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8270 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8271 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8272 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8273 representation.
8274
8275 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8276 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8277 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8278 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8279 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8280
8281 @itemize @bullet
8282 @item
8283 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8284 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8285 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8286
8287 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8288 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8289 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8290 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8291 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8292 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8293 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8294 not really a large change.
8295
8296 @item
8297 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8298 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8299 port in this code.
8300
8301 @item
8302 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8303 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8304 @end itemize
8305
8306 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8307 maintainer is familiar with.
8308
8309 @end defmac